Sunteți pe pagina 1din 296

DBS3900 WiMAX

V300R003C00

Commissioning Guide
Issue

03

Date

2011-01-25

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

About This Document

About This Document


Overview
System commissioning involves a series of commissioning operations and initial verification on
the system after the system hardware is installed. The commissioning ensures design compliance
and smooth operation of the system. This document provides guidelines for commissioning the
DBS3900 WiMAX, which includes data configuration, commissioning, and initial verification.

Product Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document.
Name

Version

DBS3900 WiMAX

V300R003C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l

Technical support engineers

Maintenance engineers

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

About This Document

Change History
Version

Change History

03 (2011-01-25)

This is the third release.


Compared with issue 02 (2010-10-22), this issue incorporates the
following changes.
l 3.3 Preparing the BS Data in GUI Mode
l 5.1 Detecting BSs Automatically
l 5.4.2 Configuring Basic Parameters
l 5.4.4 Configuring the Transmission Link

02 (2010-10-22)

This is the second release.


Compared with issue 01 (2010-06-07), issue 02 is added with the
following parts:
l 1.7 Rate of CPRI Port
l 3.3 Preparing the BS Data in GUI Mode
Compared with issue 01 (2010-06-07), this issue incorporates the
following changes.
l 4.2.2 Configuring BTS Data (Template Mode)
l 4.2.3 Configuring BTS Data (Clone Mode)
l 5.5.1 RRU3702 in 2T2R O(1) Configuration
l 5.5.2 RRU3702 in 4T4R O(1) Configuration
l 5.5.3 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration
l 5.5.4 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(1/1/1) Configuration
l 5.5.5 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(2/2/2) Configuration
l 5.5.6 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(2/2/2) Configuration
l 5.5.7 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(3/3/3) Configuration
l 5.5.8 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(3/3/3) Configuration
l 5.5.9 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration
l 5.5.10 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(2/2/2) Configuration

iv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

About This Document

Version

Change History

01 (2010-06-07)

This is the draft issue.


Compared with V300R002C03 04 (2010-04-26), this draft incorporates
the following added or updated contents:
l In 1 Background Information, the note information is modified.
l In 2 Commissioning Process During Deployment, the
descriptions of GUI-based commissioning and MML-based
commissioning are modified.
l 4.2.2 Configuring BTS Data (Template Mode) and 4.2.3
Configuring BTS Data (Clone Mode) are added. The importing of
templates in Microsoft Excel format is no longer recommended. For
details, see 9.3 Configuring the BS Data by Importing the
Template .
l Automatically Creating Commissioning Tasks is added. After
configuring BS data in the WiMAX enhanced configuration system,
you can create automatic commissioning tasks through the BS
deployment function.
l In 5.5 Typical Configuration Examples, 5.5.7 RRU3702 in 2T2R
S(3/3/3) Configuration, 5.5.8 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(3/3/3)
Configuration, 5.5.9 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration,
and 5.5.10 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(2/2/2) Configuration are added.
l In 5.8.3 Clearing Alarms, the description of the engineering state
alarm is added.

Organization
1 Background Information
This chapter describes the transmission and OM networking of a BS, typical configurations, and
commissioning modes that you need to understand before performing commissioning tasks.
2 Commissioning Process During Deployment
This section describes the commissioning process of a BS in a remote equipment room,
consisting of processes of GUI-based commissioning and MML-based commissioning.
3 Preparations for Commissioning
Before commissioning, you need to configure data and arrange for tools.
4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning
During the GUI-based remote commissioning, engineers configure the BS data through the
WiMAX enhanced configuration system and then start the commissioning tasks to commission
the BS. The RET antenna and auxiliary equipment are commissioned through MML commands.
5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning
MML-based remote commissioning is a process of commissioning a BS through MML
commands.
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

About This Document

6 Local Commissioning
When the maintenance channel between the BS and the M2000 cannot be set up automatically,
you need to run commands on the Web LMT to set up a maintenance channel on the BS side.
7 Service Verification
After the system commissioning is complete, check whether the system operates normally.
8 Configuring License Resources
The BS functions and resources are controlled by the license. You need to apply for a license
file, configure relevant control items, and distribute the license to each BS first.
9 Appendixes
The appendixes provide the commissioning record table and reference information.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol

Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

vi

Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

About This Document

Convention

Description

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in


Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

About This Document

Format

Description

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt


+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means


the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

viii

Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving


the pointer.

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and


quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Contents

Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Background Information..........................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Transmission and OM Networking ................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Commissioning Scenarios and Modes ........................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3 Antenna Bitmap...............................................................................................................................................1-7
1.4 Multiple-Carrier Configuration.......................................................................................................................1-9
1.5 RRU Topology .............................................................................................................................................1-11
1.6 Typical Configuration Types........................................................................................................................1-16
1.7 Rate of CPRI Port..........................................................................................................................................1-17
1.8 Overview of License ....................................................................................................................................1-18

2 Commissioning Process During Deployment......................................................................2-1


3 Preparations for Commissioning............................................................................................3-1
3.1 Preparing for Tools and Software................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Preparing DHCP Parameters ..........................................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Preparing the BS Data in GUI Mode.............................................................................................................. 3-6
3.4 Preparing the BS Data in MML Mode............................................................................................................3-6
3.4.1 Preparing Basic Parameters ...................................................................................................................3-7
3.4.2 Preparing Hardware Parameters...........................................................................................................3-13
3.4.3 Preparing Transmission Parameters ....................................................................................................3-19
3.4.4 Preparing R6 Link Detection Parameters (Optional)...........................................................................3-31
3.4.5 Preparing Radio Parameters.................................................................................................................3-35
3.4.6 Preparing Neighbor Cell Parameters and Trigger Parameters ............................................................3-48

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning......................................................................................4-1


4.1 Uploading the Software Package.................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Configuring the BS Data.................................................................................................................................4-3
4.2.1 Overview of Template Mode and Clone Mode......................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 Configuring BTS Data (Template Mode).............................................................................................. 4-6
4.2.3 Configuring BTS Data (Clone Mode)....................................................................................................4-8
4.2.4 Adjusting Configuration Data..............................................................................................................4-11
4.2.5 Checking Data Validity........................................................................................................................4-15
4.3 Commissioning BSs......................................................................................................................................4-16
4.3.1 Commissioning the BS Automatically.................................................................................................4-17
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Contents

4.3.2 Step-by-Step Commissioning...............................................................................................................4-20


4.4 Testing the VSWR of BTS Antennas............................................................................................................4-33
4.5 Configuring the BS Information on the ASN-GW........................................................................................4-35
4.6 Configuring the RET Antenna (Optional).....................................................................................................4-36
4.7 Configuring Auxiliary Equipment (Optional) ..............................................................................................4-38
4.7.1 Adding an OMB...................................................................................................................................4-38
4.7.2 Configuring the APM ..........................................................................................................................4-39
4.7.3 Configuring the IBBS...........................................................................................................................4-39
4.7.4 Configuring the EMU/EMUA..............................................................................................................4-40
4.7.5 Configuring Customized Alarms ........................................................................................................4-41
4.7.6 Verifying Customized Alarms ............................................................................................................4-42
4.8 Clearing Alarms............................................................................................................................................4-42

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning....................................................................................5-1


5.1 Detecting BSs Automatically .........................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Clearing Alarms..............................................................................................................................................5-6
5.3 Upgrading Software Version (Optional).........................................................................................................5-6
5.4 Configuring the BS Data.................................................................................................................................5-7
5.4.1 Methods of Running the MML Commands...........................................................................................5-8
5.4.2 Configuring Basic Parameters ...............................................................................................................5-9
5.4.3 Configuring Hardware Parameters ......................................................................................................5-10
5.4.4 Configuring the Transmission Link.....................................................................................................5-13
5.4.5 Configuring R6 Link Detection (Optional)..........................................................................................5-17
5.4.6 Configure Radio Parameters................................................................................................................5-17
5.4.7 Configuring the Information About Neighbor Cells and Triggers.......................................................5-19
5.5 Typical Configuration Examples..................................................................................................................5-20
5.5.1 RRU3702 in 2T2R O(1) Configuration ..............................................................................................5-21
5.5.2 RRU3702 in 4T4R O(1) Configuration...............................................................................................5-27
5.5.3 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration..........................................................................................5-34
5.5.4 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(1/1/1) Configuration..........................................................................................5-45
5.5.5 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(2/2/2) Configuration .........................................................................................5-54
5.5.6 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(2/2/2) Configuration..........................................................................................5-64
5.5.7 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(3/3/3) Configuration..........................................................................................5-74
5.5.8 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(3/3/3) Configuration..........................................................................................5-85
5.5.9 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration..........................................................................................5-95
5.5.10 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(2/2/2) Configuration......................................................................................5-106
5.6 Optional Commissioning Tasks .................................................................................................................5-116
5.7 Configuring the BS Information on the ASN-GW......................................................................................5-117
5.8 Checking the Running Status of the BTS....................................................................................................5-118
5.8.1 Testing the VSWR of BTS Antennas.................................................................................................5-118
5.8.2 Performing a Health Check................................................................................................................5-120
5.8.3 Clearing Alarms.................................................................................................................................5-123

6 Local Commissioning................................................................................................................6-1
x

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Contents

7 Service Verification ..................................................................................................................7-1


7.1 Performing an MS Access Test ......................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 Testing the Webpage Browsing Function.......................................................................................................7-2
7.3 Testing the FTP Service..................................................................................................................................7-3

8 Configuring License Resources...............................................................................................8-1


9 Appendixes..................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Creating Network Element (NE) Topologies Manually .................................................................................9-2
9.2 Synchronizing Data on the Existing Network.................................................................................................9-3
9.3 Configuring the BS Data by Importing the Template ....................................................................................9-4
9.4 Managing WiMAX BTS Commissioning Tasks............................................................................................ 9-7
9.4.1 Adding or Deleting BTSs to Be Commissioned.................................................................................... 9-7
9.4.2 Starting/Stopping Commissioning Tasks...............................................................................................9-9
9.4.3 Updating Configuration Scripts...........................................................................................................9-11
9.5 Security Management....................................................................................................................................9-12
9.5.1 Login Mode..........................................................................................................................................9-13
9.5.2 OM User Management.........................................................................................................................9-15
9.5.3 Local User Management......................................................................................................................9-16
9.6 Commissioning Record Form.......................................................................................................................9-20

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figures

Figures
Figure 1-1 Typical networking.............................................................................................................................1-2
Figure 1-2 Transmission and OM networking ....................................................................................................1-3
Figure 1-3 Networking of primary and secondary ASN-GWs.............................................................................1-5
Figure 1-4 Remote commissioning links .............................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-5 Local commissioning link..................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-6 RRU3702 antenna bitmap..................................................................................................................1-8
Figure 1-7 RRU3703 antenna bitmap..................................................................................................................1-9
Figure 1-8 RRU3702 antenna bitmap................................................................................................................1-10
Figure 1-9 RRU3702 chain topology.................................................................................................................1-13
Figure 1-10 RRU3702 load balancing topology................................................................................................1-13
Figure 1-11 RRU3703 chain topology...............................................................................................................1-14
Figure 1-12 RRU3703 ring topology.................................................................................................................1-15
Figure 1-13 RRU3703 load balancing topology................................................................................................1-16
Figure 2-1 GUI-based commissioning process....................................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 MML-based commissioning process..................................................................................................2-3
Figure 3-1 DHCP Configuration Management interface.................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-2 Composition of the BSID.................................................................................................................3-49
Figure 4-1 NE File Transfer dialog box.............................................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-2 Configuring the BS data in template mode........................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-3 Configuring the BS data in clone mode..............................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-4 Creation wizard...................................................................................................................................4-7
Figure 4-5 Creation wizard.................................................................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-6 Check Consistency Report dialog box...........................................................................................4-16
Figure 4-7 NE Deployment dialog box.............................................................................................................4-17
Figure 4-8 Checking configuration data.............................................................................................................4-18
Figure 4-9 Commissioning window..................................................................................................................4-19
Figure 4-10 Commissioning window................................................................................................................4-20
Figure 4-11 Generate File dialog box...............................................................................................................4-21
Figure 4-12 Verifying data.................................................................................................................................4-22
Figure 4-13 DHCP configuration management interface...................................................................................4-24
Figure 4-14 Modifying DHCP parameters ........................................................................................................4-25
Figure 4-15 Error data marked in red.................................................................................................................4-25
Figure 4-16 Checking the NE connection..........................................................................................................4-26
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figures

Figure 4-17 Wizard for creating commissioning tasks.......................................................................................4-27


Figure 4-18 Window for setting commissioning items......................................................................................4-28
Figure 4-19 Commissioning window................................................................................................................4-32
Figure 4-20 Commissioning window................................................................................................................4-33
Figure 4-21 VSWR Threshold Setting.............................................................................................................4-34
Figure 5-1 DHCP configuration management interface.......................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Modifying DHCP parameters ............................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-3 Error data marked in red.....................................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-4 Checking the NE connection..............................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-5 Command and script input text boxes................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-6 Network topology.............................................................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-7 Networking of the BS.......................................................................................................................5-21
Figure 5-8 RRU3702 in 2T2R O(1) configuration ............................................................................................5-22
Figure 5-9 Networking of the BS.......................................................................................................................5-28
Figure 5-10 RRU3702 in 4T4R O(1) configuration...........................................................................................5-29
Figure 5-11 Networking scenario.......................................................................................................................5-35
Figure 5-12 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) configuration.....................................................................................5-36
Figure 5-13 Networking scenario.......................................................................................................................5-46
Figure 5-14 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(1/1/1) configuration.....................................................................................5-47
Figure 5-15 Networking scenario.......................................................................................................................5-55
Figure 5-16 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(2/2/2) configuration.....................................................................................5-56
Figure 5-17 Networking scenario.......................................................................................................................5-65
Figure 5-18 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(2/2/2) configuration.....................................................................................5-66
Figure 5-19 Networking scenario.......................................................................................................................5-75
Figure 5-20 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(3/3/3) configuration.....................................................................................5-76
Figure 5-21 Networking scenario.......................................................................................................................5-85
Figure 5-22 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(3/3/3) configuration.....................................................................................5-86
Figure 5-23 Networking scenario.......................................................................................................................5-96
Figure 5-24 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration (CHAIN&BALANCE)..............................................5-97
Figure 5-25 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration (RING).......................................................................5-97
Figure 5-26 Networking scenario.....................................................................................................................5-107
Figure 5-27 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(2/2/2) configuration...................................................................................5-108
Figure 5-28 VSWR Threshold Setting...........................................................................................................5-119
Figure 5-29 Create task dialog box..................................................................................................................5-121
Figure 5-30 Viewing the check report .............................................................................................................5-123
Figure 8-1 Allocation information about NE license resources...........................................................................8-2
Figure 8-2 Modify window .................................................................................................................................8-3
Figure 8-3 Distributing license resources.............................................................................................................8-4
Figure 8-4 License status......................................................................................................................................8-5
Figure 9-1 Physical topology ..............................................................................................................................9-2
Figure 9-2 Creating a topology object..................................................................................................................9-3
Figure 9-3 Selecting configuration files...............................................................................................................9-5
xiv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figures

Figure 9-4 Adjusting the data in the project.........................................................................................................9-6


Figure 9-5 Adding BTSs to be commissioned.....................................................................................................9-8
Figure 9-6 Deleting BTSs to be commissioned....................................................................................................9-9
Figure 9-7 Commissioning window..................................................................................................................9-10
Figure 9-8 Re-uploading configuration files......................................................................................................9-11
Figure 9-9 Logging in to the M2000 client by an OM user...............................................................................9-13
Figure 9-10 Logging in to the BS through the Web LMT by an OM user........................................................9-14
Figure 9-11 Logging in to the BS by a local user..............................................................................................9-15
Figure 9-12 Setting the status of non-default local users...................................................................................9-17
Figure 9-13 Changing the admin user password................................................................................................9-19
Figure 9-14 Changing the guest user password..................................................................................................9-19

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Tables

Tables
Table 1-1 Antenna bitmap ...................................................................................................................................1-7
Table 1-2 BBU3900 + RRU3702 ......................................................................................................................1-16
Table 1-3 BBU3900 + RRU3703 ......................................................................................................................1-17
Table 1-4 Optical port rates required in actual scenarios...................................................................................1-18
Table 1-5 License control items.........................................................................................................................1-19
Table 3-1 Tools and software for commissioning................................................................................................3-2
Table 3-2 DHCP parameters.................................................................................................................................3-3
Table 3-3 BS information.....................................................................................................................................3-7
Table 3-4 IP address and ID of the ASN-GW .....................................................................................................3-7
Table 3-5 GPS parameters....................................................................................................................................3-8
Table 3-6 Type of the clock reference source......................................................................................................3-9
Table 3-7 Clock reference source parameters....................................................................................................3-10
Table 3-8 Type of clock source..........................................................................................................................3-11
Table 3-9 Time source parameters.....................................................................................................................3-11
Table 3-10 Time source parameters...................................................................................................................3-12
Table 3-11 Configuration data for boards .........................................................................................................3-14
Table 3-12 Parameters for configuring the RRU topology................................................................................3-16
Table 3-13 Parameters for configuring the RRU subrack..................................................................................3-17
Table 3-14 Attribute of the CPRI port................................................................................................................3-18
Table 3-15 Ethernet port parameters..................................................................................................................3-20
Table 3-16 DEVIP..............................................................................................................................................3-21
Table 3-17 Logical port parameters....................................................................................................................3-22
Table 3-18 OMCH..............................................................................................................................................3-24
Table 3-19 IP path parameters............................................................................................................................3-26
Table 3-20 Signaling channel parameters..........................................................................................................3-28
Table 3-21 Route parameters..............................................................................................................................3-28
Table 3-22 VLAN mapping parameters.............................................................................................................3-29
Table 3-23 VLAN group parameters..................................................................................................................3-31
Table 3-24 Parameters for signaling-plane detection ........................................................................................3-32
Table 3-25 Parameters for R6 user-plane detection...........................................................................................3-33
Table 3-26 Sector parameters.............................................................................................................................3-35
Table 3-27 Basic information about carriers .....................................................................................................3-36
Table 3-28 Relations between the zone type and the bandwidth........................................................................3-39
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xvii

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Tables

Table 3-29 License parameters...........................................................................................................................3-40


Table 3-30 Carrier block flag.............................................................................................................................3-42
Table 3-31 FCHRCI...........................................................................................................................................3-42
Table 3-32 Zone information..............................................................................................................................3-44
Table 3-33 Mobility capability of a BS .............................................................................................................3-48
Table 3-34 Parameters for neighbor cell relations .............................................................................................3-48
Table 3-35 Trigger parameters ..........................................................................................................................3-49
Table 4-1 Commissioning items.........................................................................................................................4-28
Table 5-1 Installation slots of boards.................................................................................................................5-10
Table 5-2 Board status........................................................................................................................................5-13
Table 5-3 Basic parameters ...............................................................................................................................5-23
Table 5-4 Transmission data...............................................................................................................................5-23
Table 5-5 Radio parameters................................................................................................................................5-24
Table 5-6 Neighbor cell parameters...................................................................................................................5-25
Table 5-7 Basic parameters ...............................................................................................................................5-30
Table 5-8 Transmission data...............................................................................................................................5-30
Table 5-9 Radio parameters................................................................................................................................5-31
Table 5-10 Neighbor cell parameters.................................................................................................................5-32
Table 5-11 Hardware parameters........................................................................................................................5-37
Table 5-12 Basic parameters .............................................................................................................................5-37
Table 5-13 Transmission data.............................................................................................................................5-37
Table 5-14 Radio parameters..............................................................................................................................5-39
Table 5-15 Neighbor cell parameters.................................................................................................................5-40
Table 5-16 Hardware parameters........................................................................................................................5-48
Table 5-17 Basic parameters .............................................................................................................................5-48
Table 5-18 Transmission data.............................................................................................................................5-48
Table 5-19 Radio parameters..............................................................................................................................5-50
Table 5-20 Neighbor cell parameters.................................................................................................................5-50
Table 5-21 Hardware parameters........................................................................................................................5-57
Table 5-22 Basic parameters .............................................................................................................................5-57
Table 5-23 Transmission data.............................................................................................................................5-58
Table 5-24 Radio parameters..............................................................................................................................5-59
Table 5-25 Neighbor cell parameters.................................................................................................................5-60
Table 5-26 Hardware parameters........................................................................................................................5-67
Table 5-27 Basic parameters .............................................................................................................................5-67
Table 5-28 Transmission data.............................................................................................................................5-67
Table 5-29 Radio parameters..............................................................................................................................5-69
Table 5-30 Neighbor cell parameters.................................................................................................................5-70
Table 5-31 Hardware parameters........................................................................................................................5-77
Table 5-32 Basic parameters .............................................................................................................................5-77
Table 5-33 Transmission data.............................................................................................................................5-78
Table 5-34 Radio parameters..............................................................................................................................5-79
xviii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Tables

Table 5-35 Neighbor cell parameters.................................................................................................................5-80


Table 5-36 Hardware parameters........................................................................................................................5-87
Table 5-37 Basic parameters ............................................................................................................................. 5-88
Table 5-38 Transmission data.............................................................................................................................5-88
Table 5-39 Radio parameters..............................................................................................................................5-89
Table 5-40 Neighbor cell parameters................................................................................................................. 5-90
Table 5-41 Hardware parameters........................................................................................................................5-98
Table 5-42 Basic parameters ............................................................................................................................. 5-99
Table 5-43 Transmission data.............................................................................................................................5-99
Table 5-44 Radio parameters............................................................................................................................5-101
Table 5-45 Neighbor cell parameters...............................................................................................................5-102
Table 5-46 Hardware parameters......................................................................................................................5-109
Table 5-47 Basic parameters ...........................................................................................................................5-109
Table 5-48 Transmission data...........................................................................................................................5-110
Table 5-49 Radio parameters............................................................................................................................5-111
Table 5-50 Neighbor cell parameters...............................................................................................................5-112
Table 5-51 Item description .............................................................................................................................5-120
Table 5-52 Description of parameters in the Time Setting group box.............................................................5-122
Table 9-1 Managing local users..........................................................................................................................9-18
Table 9-2 Commissioning records......................................................................................................................9-20

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xix

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

Background Information

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the transmission and OM networking of a BS, typical configurations, and
commissioning modes that you need to understand before performing commissioning tasks.
1.1 Transmission and OM Networking
This section describes the typical networking, BS IP address assignment, and networking of
primary and secondary ASN-GWs.
1.2 Commissioning Scenarios and Modes
The BS commissioning scenarios consist of local commissioning and remote commissioning.
The commissioning modes are categorized into GUI-based commissioning and MML-based
commissioning.
1.3 Antenna Bitmap
The RRU3702 can be used as either a 4T4R RRU or two 2T2R RRUs. The RRU3703 can be
only used as three 2T2R RRUs. Therefore, you can group the RF channel and antennas by
configuring the antenna bitmap.
1.4 Multiple-Carrier Configuration
The DBS3900 WiMAX supports multiple carriers. You need to familiar yourself with the
functions and configuration restrictions before preparing the data and configuring carriers.
1.5 RRU Topology
RRU topology means the RRU chain, including chain topology, ring topology, and load
balancing topology.
1.6 Typical Configuration Types
This section describes typical configuration types of the DBS3900 WiMAX.
1.7 Rate of CPRI Port
This section describes the rates of the optical ports on the BBBI and the RRU and the
requirements for rates in actual scenarios.
1.8 Overview of License
This section describes the license policy for the current release.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

1.1 Transmission and OM Networking


This section describes the typical networking, BS IP address assignment, and networking of
primary and secondary ASN-GWs.

Network Structure
Figure 1-1 shows the typical networking.
Figure 1-1 Typical networking

MS: Mobile Station

SS: Subscriber Station

ASN: Access Service Network

GW: Gateway

CSN: Connectivity Service Network

CPE: Customer Premises Equipment

EMS: Element Management System

BS: Base Station

Transmission and OM Schemes


Figure 1-2 shows the model of the BS transmission and OM schemes.
l

DEVIP: IP address of the transmission port. A local IP address needs to be configured for
the OM channel, IP path, and signaling channel according to DEVIP.
Each port is configured with a maximum of four DEVIPs. Generally, one or two DEVIPs
are configured, as shown in BS IP Address Assignment .

SIG IP: Local IP address of the signaling channel. It is a logical IP address, and depends
on the DEVIP.
The signaling channel is used for exchanging signals between the BS and the ASN-GW.

1-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

OM IP: It indicates the local IP address of the OM channel. It is a logical IP address, and
depends on the DEVIP.
The OM channel is the remote maintenance channel between the BS and the M2000.

The local IP address of the IP path is the same as the DEVIP assigned to the IP path.
The IP path is a transmission channel, which is used to transmit traffic data between the
BS and the ASN-GW.

Figure 1-2 Transmission and OM networking

BS IP Address Assignment
l

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

One BS is configured with one DEVIP.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information
NOTE

l The OM IP address, signaling IP address, and local IP address of the IP path are the same as the
DEVIP.
l The next-hop IP address and the DEVIP must belong to the same network segment.
l When a BS is configured with one DEVIP, the DEVIP and the IP address of the local maintenance
port must belong to different network segments.

A BS is configured with two DEVIPs.

NOTE

l DEVIP1 is for the DEVIP of the OM channel, and DEVIP2 is for the DEVIPs of the IP path and
the signaling channel. DEVIP1 and DEVIP2 must belong to different network segments. DEVIP1
and the IP address of the local maintenance port must belong to different segments.
l OM IP belongs to the same network segment as DEVIP1 does and needs to be the same as
DEVIP1.
l The local IP address of the IP path is the same as DEVIP2.
l The local IP address of the signaling channel belongs to the same network segment as DEVIP2
does and must be different from DEVIP2. If they are the same, you cannot configure the R6 userplane detection.
l NEXTHOP IP1 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the M2000. NEXTHOP IP1 and
DEVIP1 must belong to the same network segment. NEXTHOP IP2 is the next-hop IP address
from the BS to the ASN-GW. NEXTHOP IP2 and DEVIP2 must belong to the same network
segment.

Primary/Secondary ASN-GW Scheme


In the primary/secondary ASN-GW scheme, both primary and secondary ASN-GWs are
connected to a BS, and the R6 link between the BS and the ASN-GW is categorized into primary
link and secondary link, as shown in Figure 1-3.

1-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

Figure 1-3 Networking of primary and secondary ASN-GWs

When the primary ASN-GW or the primary R6 link is faulty, the BS automatically switches
to the connection with the secondary ASN-GW.

When the fault in the primary ASN-GW or the fault in the primary R6 link is rectified,
switch the BS to the connection with the primary ASN-GW manually. Otherwise, when
the secondary ASN-GW or the secondary R6 link is faulty, the BS does not automatically
switch to the connection with the primary ASN-GW or primary R6 link.

When configuring the IP path and the signaling channel, you need to configure different
IP addresses for different ASN-GWs.

1.2 Commissioning Scenarios and Modes


The BS commissioning scenarios consist of local commissioning and remote commissioning.
The commissioning modes are categorized into GUI-based commissioning and MML-based
commissioning.

Commissioning Scenarios
The BS commissioning scenarios consist of local commissioning and remote commissioning.
Remote commissioning is recommended.
l

Remote commissioning: After the hardware installation is complete and the BS is powered
on, the M2000 automatically detects the BS through the DHCP function. In this case, you
can perform commissioning operations through the M2000 client in the network
management center.
Remote commissioning can be performed in batches in the network management center. It
is convenient and cost-effective. Therefore, it is recommended.
During remote commissioning, the OM network is connected to the BS through the
transmission port of the BS, as shown in Figure 1-4.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-5

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

Figure 1-4 Remote commissioning links

Local commissioning: It is performed through the Web LMT at the site. When the M2000
in the remote equipment room cannot automatically detect the BS, local commissioning is
required.
During local commissioning, you need to connect the commissioning PC to the local
maintenance port (ETH) of the BS using an Ethernet cable, as shown in Figure 1-5.
NOTE

The default IP address of the local maintenance port is 192.168.0.100.

Figure 1-5 Local commissioning link

Commissioning Modes
Commissioning modes are categorized into GUI-based commissioning and MML-based
commissioning.
l

1-6

In GUI-based commissioning: The configuration script is configured through the WiMAX


enhanced configuration function of the M2000. Then, the software upgrade, configuration
activation, and health check of one or multiple BSs are performed through the GUI
commissioning tool of the M2000.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

Through the WiMAX enhanced configuration function, the configuration script is


configured in template mode or clone mode. For details, see 4.2.1 Overview of Template
Mode and Clone Mode.

CAUTION
The template mode and clone mode of the WiMAX enhanced configuration function do
not support the configuration of E1/T1 transmission. For the WiMAX DBS3900, if the E1/
T1 transmission is used, you need to configure the BS data by running MML commands.
l

Through MML-based commissioning, you can run MML commands on the M2000 client
to perform the commissioning for a single BS and enable the basic services of the BS.
NOTE

l After the configuration on the BS side is complete, you need to run MML commands on the Web LMT
of the ASN-GW to configure the BS information.
l After the required RET antenna and the auxiliary equipment are installed, you need to run MML
commands to perform the commissioning for each BS.

1.3 Antenna Bitmap


The RRU3702 can be used as either a 4T4R RRU or two 2T2R RRUs. The RRU3703 can be
only used as three 2T2R RRUs. Therefore, you can group the RF channel and antennas by
configuring the antenna bitmap.
Run the ADD CARRIERBASICINFO command to set the ANTBITMAP parameter for
different antenna bitmaps. Table 1-1 describes the configurations on the antenna bitmaps of the
RRU3702 and RRU3703.
Table 1-1 Antenna bitmap

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Classificat
ion

RRU3702

RRU3703

RRU3701C

ANTBITM
AP=2ANT_
0

The RF channels
ANTA and ANTB
are in the same group
to form a 2T2R RRU.

The two RF channels


ANT0 and ANT1 are in
the same group to form a
2T2R RRU.

The RRU3701C is used


as a 2T2R RRU.
Therefore, the antenna
bitmap can be set only to
2ANT_0. The
RRU3701C uses the RF
channels ANTA and
ANTB.

ANTBITM
AP=2ANT_
1

The RF channels
ANTC and ANTD
are in the same group
to form a 2T2R RRU.

The RF channels ANT2


and ANT3 are in the same
group to form a 2T2R
RRU.

This configuration is not


supported.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-7

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

Classificat
ion

RRU3702

RRU3703

RRU3701C

ANTBITM
AP=2ANT_
2

This configuration is
not supported.

The RF channels ANT4


and ANT5 are in the same
group to form a 2T2R
RRU.

This configuration is not


supported.

ANTBITM
AP=4ANT

The RF channels
ABTA, ANTB,
ANTC, and ANTD
are in the same group
to form a 4T4R RRU.

This configuration is not


supported.

This configuration is not


supported.

NOTE

When both the BBIa and the RRU3702 are used, ANTBITMAP must be 2ANT_0 or 2ANT_1.

Figure 1-6 and Figure 1-7 show the groupings of the RRU3702 and RRU3703 RF channels.
Figure 1-6 RRU3702 antenna bitmap

1-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

Figure 1-7 RRU3703 antenna bitmap

1.4 Multiple-Carrier Configuration


The DBS3900 WiMAX supports multiple carriers. You need to familiar yourself with the
functions and configuration restrictions before preparing the data and configuring carriers.

Functions of Multiple Carriers


Supporting multiple carriers means that a group of RF channels of an RRU can transmit and
receive multiple carriers simultaneously. For details on the classifications of RF channels, see
1.3 Antenna Bitmap.
Multiple carriers provide more capacity for a BS. In addition, the cost on equipment and
installation is reduced by addition of carriers through software configuration.

Multi-Carrier Configuration Restrictions


l

The numbers of carriers carried on different RRUs are different.


The RRU3701C supports only the configuration of a single sector and a single carrier.
For the RRU3702 in 4T4R configuration, one RRU supports a maximum of one sector
and three carriers.
For the RRU3702 in 2T2R configuration, one RRU supports a maximum of two sectors
and each sector supports three carriers.
For the RRU3703 only in 2T2R configuration, one RRU supports a maximum of three
sectors and each sector supports two carriers.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

When three carriers are configured, the connection between the RRU3702 and the BBBI
varies in different antenna bitmaps, as shown in Figure 1-8.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-9

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

When the antenna bitmap of the RRU3702 is 4ANT, the RRU3702 is connected to the
CPRI0 port and CPRI2 port on the BBBI using two optical fibers. The optical fiber
connected to the CPRI0 port on the BBBI bears two carriers. The optical fiber connected
to the CPRI2 port on the BBBI bears one carrier.
When the antenna bitmap of the RRU3702 is 2ANT_0 or 2ANT_1, one optical fiber
bears three carriers. The optical fiber must be connected to the CRPI0 port on the BBBI.
Figure 1-8 RRU3702 antenna bitmap

The frequencies of multiple carriers on the same RF channel cannot be overlapped with
each other, and the frequency range of multiple carriers cannot exceed 30 MHz.
If an RF channel is configured with three 10-MHz carriers and the central frequencies are
f1, f2 and f3 (f3 > f2 > f1), the following conditions must be met:
(f2 - f1) 10 MHz
(f3 - f2) 10 MHz
(f3 + 10/2) - (f1 - 10/2) 30 MHz

The sum of effective transmit power (EIRP) of multiple carriers on the same RF channel
cannot be higher than the maximum transmit power of RF channels of the RRU.
The maximum transmit power of 2.3 GHz and 2.5 GHz RRU3702s is 40 dBm. The
maximum transmit power of a 3.5 GHz RRU3702 is 38.4 dBm.
The maximum transmit power of the RRU3703 RF channel is 40 dBm.
The maximum transmit power of the RRU3701C RF channel is 37 dBm.

1-10

When multiple carriers are configured, the restrictions on the CPRI port on the BBBI are
as follows:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

One BBBI supports a maximum of three carriers. In non-convergence mode, one CPRI
port supports one carrier. The convergence mode of the CPRI port must be disabled.
When the CPRI ports on the BBBI are configured as the convergence of two optical
ports, the CPRI0 supports two carriers, the CPRI1 cannot be used, and the CPRI2
supports only one carrier.
When the CPRI ports on the BBBI are configured as the convergence of three optical
ports, the CPRI0 port supports three carriers, and the CPRI1 and CPRI2 ports cannot
be used.
The rate and convergence mode of the CPRI port can be set through the MOD
CPRIINFO command.

CAUTION
Special cases: When the RRU is in ring topology, the CPRI1 and CPRI0 ports are in cold
backup mode and the CPRI1 port also supports three carriers; however, two CPRI ports
cannot work simultaneously.

1.5 RRU Topology


RRU topology means the RRU chain, including chain topology, ring topology, and load
balancing topology.

Topologies
Run the ADD RRUCHAIN command to set the RRU topology.
The values of Topology Type are as follows:
l

CHAIN: Chain topology.


In chain topology, the RRU and BBU are connected through an optical fiber. There is only
one CPRI link between the RRU and the BBU. Therefore, transmission backup and load
balancing cannot be implemented.
In chain topology, chain header parameters, including HCN, HSRN, HSN, and HPN, are
used to identify the slot No. of the BBBI and the No. of the CPRI port that are connected
through an optical fiber.

RING: Ring topology.


In ring topology, the RRU and BBU are connected through two optical fibers which must
be connected to the CPRI0 and CPRI1 ports on the same BBBI. There are two CPRI links
between the RRU and the BBU. The two links are in cold backup mode. When either of
the links is faulty, data transmission is automatically switched to the other link.
In ring topology, ring header parameters, including HCN, HSRN, HSN, and HPN, are
used to identify the slot No. of the BBBI and the No. of the CPRI port connected through
one optical fiber; ring tail parameters, including TCN, TSRN, TSN, and TPN, are used to
identify the slot No. of the BBBI and the No. of the CPRI port connected through the other
optical fiber.

BALANCE: Load balancing topology.


In load balancing topology, the RRU and BBU are connected through two optical fibers.
There are two CPRI links between the RRU and the BBU. They work simultaneously to

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-11

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

transmit different data. When either of the links is faulty, the data on the other link is not
affected.
In load balancing topology, load balancing header parameters, including HCN, HSRN,
HSN, and HPN, are used to identify the slot No. of the BBBI and the No. of the CPRI port
connected through one optical fiber; load balancing tail parameters, including TCN,
TSRN, TSN, and TPN, are used to identify the slot No. of the BBBI and the No. of the
CPRI port connected through the other optical fiber.
Parameter

Meaning

HCN

No. of the cabinet where the board connected to the head of the chain/ring/
load balancing topology is installed. It is set to 0.

HSRN

No. of the subrack where the board connected to the head of the chain/ring/
load balancing topology is installed. It is set to 0.

HSN

No. of the slot where the board connected to the head of the chain/ring/load
balancing topology is installed.

HPN

No. of the optical port where the head of the chain/ring/load balancing
topology is connected.

TCN

No. of the cabinet where the board connected to the tail of the chain/load
balancing topology is installed.

TSRN

No. of the subrack where the board connected to the tail of the ring/load
balancing topology is installed.

TSN

No. of the slot where the board connected to the tail of the ring/load balancing
topology is installed.

TPN

No. of the optical port where the tail of the ring/load balancing topology is
connected.

CAUTION
l The RRU3702 supports the chain topology and load balancing topology, the RRU3703
supports the chain topology, ring topology, and load balancing topology, and the RRU3701C
supports only the chain topology.
l When the head and tail of the load balancing topology are configured on different BBBIs,
the RRUCHAIN fails to be configured if the rates of the CPRI ports on two BBBIs are
inconsistent.

RRU3702 Topology Examples


l

Chain topology
Each RRU3702 is connected to the CPRI port on the BBBI through an optical fiber. Figure
1-9 shows the typical topology.

1-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

Figure 1-9 RRU3702 chain topology

Load balancing topology


Each RRU3702 is connected to two CPRI ports on the BBBI through two optical fibers.
The two optical fibers work independently and transmit different data. Figure 1-10 shows
the typical topology.
Figure 1-10 RRU3702 load balancing topology

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-13

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

RRU3703 Topology Examples


l

Chain topology
Each RRU3703 is connected to the CPRI0 port on the BBBI through an optical fiber. Figure
1-11 shows the typical topology.
Figure 1-11 RRU3703 chain topology

Ring topology
Each RRU3703 is connected to the CPRI0 port and CPRI1 port on the BBBI through two
optical fibers. Figure 1-12 shows the typical topology.

1-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

Figure 1-12 RRU3703 ring topology

Load balancing topology


Each RRU3703 is connected to the CPRI0 port and CPRI2 ports on one BBBI through
two optical fibers. The optical fiber connected to the CPRI0 port on the BBBI bears two
carriers and the other optical fiber bears only one carrier. The two optical fibers work
independently. Figure 1-13 shows the typical topology.
Each RRU3703 is connected to the CPRI0 port on two BBBIs through two optical fibers.
Each optical fiber bears three carriers and works independently. Figure 1-13 shows the
typical topology.
NOTE

When the RRU3703 is in load balancing topology, each sector of a BS cannot be configured with
two carriers.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-15

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

Figure 1-13 RRU3703 load balancing topology

1.6 Typical Configuration Types


This section describes typical configuration types of the DBS3900 WiMAX.
Table 1-2 BBU3900 + RRU3702
Configuratio
n Type

Number
of BBBIs

Number
of RRUs

Number of CPRI
Optical Fibers

Reference

O(1), 2T2R

5.5.1 RRU3702 in
2T2R O(1)
Configuration

O(1), 4T4R

5.5.2 RRU3702 in
4T4R O(1)
Configuration

S(1/1/1), 2T2R

l Nonconvergence
mode: 3

5.5.3 RRU3702 in
2T2R S(1/1/1)
Configuration

l Convergence
mode: 2
S(1/1/1), 4T4R

1-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5.5.4 RRU3702 in
4T4R S(1/1/1)
Configuration

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

Configuratio
n Type

Number
of BBBIs

Number
of RRUs

Number of CPRI
Optical Fibers

Reference

S(2/2/2), 2T2R

5.5.5 RRU3702 in
2T2R S(2/2/2)
Configuration

S(2/2/2), 4T4R

5.5.6 RRU3702 in
4T4R S(2/2/2)
Configuration

S(3/3/3), 2T2R

5.5.7 RRU3702 in
2T2R S(3/3/3)
Configuration

S(3/3/3), 4T4R

5.5.8 RRU3702 in
4T4R S(3/3/3)
Configuration

Table 1-3 BBU3900 + RRU3703


Configur
ation
Type

Number
of
BBBIs

Number
of RRUs

Number of CPRI Optical


Fibers

Reference

S(1/1/1),
2T2R

l Chain topology: 1

S(2/2/2),
2T2R

l Ring topology: 2
1

5.5.9 RRU3703 in
2T2R S(1/1/1)
Configuration
5.5.10 RRU3703 in
2T2R S(2/2/2)
Configuration

1.7 Rate of CPRI Port


This section describes the rates of the optical ports on the BBBI and the RRU and the
requirements for rates in actual scenarios.
The requirements for optical port rates are as follows:
l

The optical port on the BBBIa supports a rate of 2.45 Gbit/s and the optical ports on the
BBBIb support the rates of 2.45 Gbit/s and 3.84 Gbit/s.

The optical port on the RRU3701C supports a rate of 2.45 Gbit/s and the optical port on
the RRU3702 supports the rates of 2.45 Gbit/s and 3.84 Gbit/s.

The RRU3703 supports a rate of 3.84 Gbit/s.

The rate supported by the RRU connected to the BBBI must be consistent with the rate
supported by the BBBI. For example, the RRU3703 cannot be connected to the BBBIa.

When an RRU is connected to two BBBIs, the rate supported by the optical ports on the
two BBBIs must be consistent.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-17

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

When a BBBI is connected to multiple RRUs, the rate supported by the optical ports on
the RRUs must be consistent.

Table 1-4 Optical port rates required in actual scenarios


Scenario
Hardware
Configuration

Anten
na
Bitma
p

Port
Convergenc
e Mode

Typical
Configuration

BBBIa + RRU3701C/
RRU3702

2T2R

Nonconvergence

O(1), S(1/1/1)

2.45 Gbit/s

BBBIb + RRU3701C

2T2R

Nonconvergence

O(1), S(1/1/1)

2.45 Gbit/s

2T2R

The optical
port rate is not
related to the
convergence
mode.

S(1/1/1), S(2/2/2)

3.84 Gbit/s

2T2R

Nonconvergence

O(1), S(1/1/1)

2.45 Gbit/s

2T2R

Two-optical
port
convergence

O(2), S(1/1/1), S
(2/2/2)

2.45 Gbit/s

2T2R

Three-optical
port
convergence

O(3), S(3/3/3)

3.84 Gbit/s

4T4R

Nonconvergence

O(1), S(1/1/1), S
(2/2/2)

2.45 Gbit/s

4T4R

Two-optical
port
convergence

O(3), S(3/3/3)

3.84 Gbit/s

BBBIb + RRU3703

BBBIb + RRU3702

Optical Port
Rate

1.8 Overview of License


This section describes the license policy for the current release.

License Function
The license is used to authorize a user to use restricted functions of a BS. Table 1-5 lists the
license control items.

1-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

Table 1-5 License control items

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Paramet
er

Name
Displayed on
the M2000
Interface

Meaning

BASIC

Basic Feature

Control item for basic functions

ETH-CS

Ethernet
Convergence

Control item for the Ethernet convergence function

MOBILI
TY

Mobility

Control item for the mobility feature. It is used to control


whether the handover can be implemented between BSs.

TWOAN
TENNA
MIMO

Two-Antenna
MIMO

Control item for the two-antenna MIMO function


Control item for the four-antenna MIMO function

FOURAN
TENNA
MIMO

Four-Antenna
MIMO

AIRITFE
NCRYPT

Air Interface
Data Encryption

Control item for the data encryption over the air interface

WHOLE
SALE

Wholesale

Control item for the wholesale feature

VOIPEN
HANCE

VoIP
Enhancement

Control item for the VoIP enhanced function. It is used to


control dynamic service flows and PHS function.

NOTE
When there are four transmit antennas and four receive antennas for
the DBS3900 WiMAX sectors, the four-antenna MIMO function is
supported.

Control item for the beamforming function. It is used to


control the beamforming of an antenna.

BEAMF
ORMING

Beamforming

NOTE
When there are four transmit antennas and four receive antennas for
the DBS3900 WiMAX sectors, the beamforming function is
supported.

ULENHA
NCEME
NT

Uplink
Enhancement

Control item for the uplink enhanced function. It is used to


control the uplink 2Tx function and uplink 64 QAM.

BANDWI
DTH5M

Bandwith 5M

Control item for the carrier with a bandwidth of 5 MHz. A


BS can be configured with a carrier with a bandwidth of 5
MHz even if no license is installed for the BS.

BANDWI
DTH7M

Bandwith 7M

Control item for the carrier with a bandwidth of 7 MHz. A


BS can be configured with a carrier with a bandwidth of 7
MHz even if no license is installed for the BS.

BANDWI
DTH10M

Bandwith 10M

Control item for the carrier with a bandwidth of 10 MHz. A


BS can be configured with a carrier with a bandwidth of 10
MHz even if no license is installed for the BS.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-19

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

1 Background Information

Paramet
er

Name
Displayed on
the M2000
Interface

Meaning

ACTIVE
USERNU
M

Active User
Number

Control item for the number of activated subscribers. It is


used to control the number of activated subscribers. The
number of subscribers under a BS cannot exceed the value
that is applied for.

SELFBA
CKHAU
L

Self-Backhaul

Control item for the self-backhaul function

SYNENH
ANCED

Enhancement
Synchronization

Control item for the network clock function. It is used to


control whether the network clock based on the IEEE P1588
V2 protocol is supported. The control level is by BS.

IPSEC

IPSEC

Control item for the IPSEC function

RETCON
TROL

RET Control

Control item for the function of a RET antenna

License Commissioning Period


The license commissioning period refers to 60 days during which a BS is running after it is
initially started. During this period, the license status of the BS is called the license
commissioning status. During the commissioning period. all functions of the BS do not
controlled by the license. Therefore, you do not need to distribute the license to each BS when
performing commissioning on each BS. You can distribute the license after the commissioning
of multiple BSs, thus improving the efficiency of site deployment.
After 30 days of commissioning, the BS reports alarms to remind the user of the deadline of the
commissioning period. Then, the user needs to configure the official license.
After the commissioning period, the BS must switch to the official license. If the license control
items are insufficient, disable the corresponding function of the BS and do not deactivate the
carriers. In addition, alarms are reported.

License Version Verification


The BS automatically checks whether its software version is consistent with the license version.
l

If they are inconsistent, check the license status of the BS first.


If the license is normal, the BS is in a trial status and reports alarms. The trial period of
the license is 60 days.
If the license is in trial period or expires the trial period, the BS is running in the current
status and reports alarms.

1-20

If the BS software version and the license version are consistent, and alarms were generated
before, the BS clears the alarms and restores the license controlling.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

2 Commissioning Process During Deployment

Commissioning Process During


Deployment

This section describes the commissioning process of a BS in a remote equipment room,


consisting of processes of GUI-based commissioning and MML-based commissioning.

GUI-Based Commissioning Process


Figure 2-1 shows the commissioning process. For details, see 4 GUI-Based Remote
Commissioning.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

2 Commissioning Process During Deployment

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figure 2-1 GUI-based commissioning process

MML-Based Commissioning Process


Figure 2-2 shows the commissioning process. For details, see 5 MML-Based Remote
Commissioning.

2-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

2 Commissioning Process During Deployment

Figure 2-2 MML-based commissioning process

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Preparations for Commissioning

About This Chapter


Before commissioning, you need to configure data and arrange for tools.
3.1 Preparing for Tools and Software
Before commissioning, ensure that the tools and software are available.
3.2 Preparing DHCP Parameters
On the M2000, the DHCP parameters are used to detect BSs. Then, the OM channel is
automatically set up between the BS and the M2000.
3.3 Preparing the BS Data in GUI Mode
The configuration data of a BS involves the basic BS information, hardware parameters,
transmission parameters, radio parameters, neighbor cell parameters, and trigger parameters.
3.4 Preparing the BS Data in MML Mode
The configuration data of a BS involves the basic BS information, hardware parameters,
transmission parameters, radio parameters, neighbor cell parameters, and trigger parameters.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

3.1 Preparing for Tools and Software


Before commissioning, ensure that the tools and software are available.

Tools and Software


Table 3-1 lists the tools and software required for commissioning.
Table 3-1 Tools and software for commissioning
Tool

Description

M2000 mediation

Log in to http://support.huawei.com. Choose Software >


Version Software > Wireless Product Line > WiMAX >
WiMAX BTS to download the M2000 mediation and software
package.
For details about how to install the M2000 mediation, see
Installing the M2000 Server Software in the M2000
Commissioning Guide.

Software package

M2000 client

On the M2000 client, you can run the MML commands to


configure a single BS.
The default user name is admin, and the initial password is null.
When logging in for the first time, change the password according
to the system message.

Web LMT

You do not need to install the client software. You can log in to
the Web LMT on a Web page. You can run the MML commands
and query alarms through the Web LMT.
The default user names are admin and guest. The initial
passwords of users admin and guest are admin123 and guest
respectively.

ASN-GW LMT

It is used for configuring the BS information on the ASN-GW.


The default user name is admin, and the initial password is admin.

Installing the M2000 Client


After installing the M2000 server, install the client in Web mode.
1.

In the address bar, enter https://xx.xx.xx.xx/cau. Then, the Install System interface is
displayed.
xx.xx.xx.xx must be the IP address of the M2000 server. For example, if the IP address of
the M2000 server is 192.168.10.105, you need to enter https://192.168.10.105/cau in the
address bar.

3-2

2.

Read the installation guide and FAQ.

3.

Click Setup, and then install the M2000 client according to the displayed messages.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

3.2 Preparing DHCP Parameters


On the M2000, the DHCP parameters are used to detect BSs. Then, the OM channel is
automatically set up between the BS and the M2000.

DHCP Parameter Description


Table 3-2 describes the parameters in the DHCP Parameter Template.
Table 3-2 DHCP parameters

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of Parameter
Value

Site Name

Name of an NE in the
topology of the
M2000

Network
planning

WiMAX

ESN

Unique identifier of
an NE

After the BS is
powered on, the
ESN and location
of the BS are
automatically
reported to the
M2000. For
details about how
to query the ESN
and location
information, see
ESN Query.

2102120275P08A000109

Gateway IP

IP address of the
ASN-GW that
communicates with
the BS

Negotiation with
the connected
ASN-GW

172.16.41.10

SecuGW IP

IP address of the SEGW Currently,


Huawei WiMAX BS
is not connected to
the SE-GW.

Not involved.

OM IP

Local IP address of
the OM channel. It is
used for setting up the
connection between
the BS and the
M2000

Negotiation with
the operator

172.17.11.19

OM Netmask

Subnet mask of the


OM IP address

Network
planning

255.255.255.0

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

3-4

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of Parameter
Value

Interface IP

Device IP address of
the OM channel
(DEVIP)

Negotiation with
the operator

172.17.11.19

Interface Netmask

Subnet mask of the


device IP address of
the OM channel

Network
planning

255.255.255.0

M2000 IP

IP address of the
M2000 server

Network
planning

192.168.10.105

M2000 Netmask

Subnet mask of the IP


address of the M2000

Network
planning

255.255.255.255

OM VLAN ID

VLAN ID used for


the OM channel. If
the maintenance
network is in VLAN
networking mode and
the broadcast
message with a
VLAN ID can be
transmitted on the
OM channel, you
need to configure the
VLAN ID.

Network
planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11
Default value: 0

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of Parameter
Value

OM Ping IP

IP address of the OM
channel for detecting
the M2000. It is used
to check whether the
route from an NE to
the M2000 can be
successfully pinged.
Generally, the
detection IP address
of the OM channel is
the same as the IP
address of the
M2000. If the M2000
is configured with the
firewall, you cannot
successfully ping the
M2000 through the
computer connected
to the BS. In this case,
the detection IP
address of the OM
channel is the IP
address of the
switching device on
the higher layer of the
firewall, for example,
the IP address of the
switching device
closest to the
firewall.

Network
planning

192.168.10.105

OM Next Hop IP

Device IP address of
the next hop of the
OM channel

Network
planning

172.17.11.1

ESN Query
1.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

On the iManager M2000 Mobile Element Management System, choose Configuration >
DHCP Configuration Management. The DHCP Configuration Management interface
is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-5

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Figure 3-1 DHCP Configuration Management interface

2.

Click the GPS tab to view the ESN and the longitude and latitude information.

3.3 Preparing the BS Data in GUI Mode


The configuration data of a BS involves the basic BS information, hardware parameters,
transmission parameters, radio parameters, neighbor cell parameters, and trigger parameters.
You need to prepare the data for BS configuration using the WiMAX enhanced configuration
system. WCS-Parameter-DBS3900.xls lists the IDs and commands corresponding to the
parameters displayed on the interface of the WiMAX enhanced configuration system. For details,
see 3.4 Preparing the BS Data in MML Mode and the DBS3900 WiMAX MML Command
Reference.

3.4 Preparing the BS Data in MML Mode


The configuration data of a BS involves the basic BS information, hardware parameters,
transmission parameters, radio parameters, neighbor cell parameters, and trigger parameters.
3.4.1 Preparing Basic Parameters
Basic parameters consist of BS information, GW information, parameters of clock reference
source, and parameters for time source.
3.4.2 Preparing Hardware Parameters
This section describes how to configure the BS hardware information, which includes the board
information, RRU information, and rate and convergence mode of CPRI ports.
3.4.3 Preparing Transmission Parameters
3-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

This section describes major transmission parameters. You need to prepare the data based on
the actual transmission networking.
3.4.4 Preparing R6 Link Detection Parameters (Optional)
The R6 link detection involves signaling-plane detection and user-plane detection. If the
signaling-plane detection and user-plane detection are required, relevant parameters need be
configured after the transmission links are configured.
3.4.5 Preparing Radio Parameters
This section describes radio parameters to be configured during the deployment.
3.4.6 Preparing Neighbor Cell Parameters and Trigger Parameters
This section describes neighbor cell parameters and trigger parameters.

3.4.1 Preparing Basic Parameters


Basic parameters consist of BS information, GW information, parameters of clock reference
source, and parameters for time source.

BS Information
Table 3-3 lists the BS information. The relevant command is as follows: ADD BTSINFO.
Table 3-3 BS information
Parameter

Description

Value Source

OPERATORID

ID of an operator

Negotiation with the


operator

100

SITEID

ID of a site. It uniquely
identifies a site of an
operator.

Network planning

10

Example of
Parameter Value

Gateway Information
Table 3-4 lists the gateway information. The relevant command is as follows: MOD GWIP.
NOTE

The BS can be connected to the primary ASN-GW and secondary ASN-GW. When the primary ASN-GW
is faulty, the BS automatically switches to the secondary ASN-GW.

Table 3-4 IP address and ID of the ASN-GW

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

GWIP

IP address of the
primary ASN-GW to
which the BS is
connected

Network planning

172.16.41.10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-7

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

GWID

ID of the primary ASNGW to which the BS is


connected

Network planning

0101-0101-0101

SECONDARYGWI
P

IP address of the
secondary gateway to
which the BS is
connected

Network planning

172.16.45.10

SECONDARYGWI
D

ID of the secondary
gateway to which the
BS is connected

Network planning

0505-0505-0505

Clock Reference Source Parameters


Clock reference sources are configured to provide precise clock signals to the BS system. The
following part describes the configuration data required when the GPS antenna system is
installed on the BS.
l

When the GPS antenna system is installed to the BS, the GPS need to be configured. For
parameters, see Table 3-5. The relevant command is as follows: ADD GPS and MOD
GPS.
Table 3-5 GPS parameters
Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

GN

GPS ID

Hardware
configuration

SN

No. of the slot where the


satellite card is located.
The GPS satellite card is
installed on the BMPT
and the GLONASS/GPS
satellite card is installed
on the USCU.

Hardware
configuration

Hardware
configuration

COAXIAL

Hardware
configuration

Feeder type:
CABLETYPE

l Twisted-pair cable
l Coaxial cable

CABLE_LEN

3-8

Feeder length

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

Hardware
configuration

GPS

Hardware
configuration

GPS

Working mode of the


satellite card. There are
two working modes of
satellite cards: single
mode and dual mode.
l Dual-mode satellite
card supports two
satellite searching
modes. For example,
GPS/GLONASS
indicates dual-mode
satellite card and GPS
is the active mode.

MODE

l Single-mode satellite
card supports only one
satellite searching
mode.
GPS type, including GPS
and RGPS

TYPE

Select the type of clock reference source and set the priority. Table 3-6 lists the parameters.
The relevant command is as follows: ADD CLKSRC.
Table 3-6 Type of the clock reference source

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

CLKSRC

It indicates the type of the


clock source.

Hardware
configuration

GPS

PRI

It indicates the priority of


the reference source. The
value 1 indicates the
highest priority, and the
value 4 indicates the
lowest priority.

Network planning

Set the working mode of the clock. Table 3-7 lists the parameters. The relevant command
is as follows: SET CLKMODE.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-9

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 3-7 Clock reference source parameters


Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

Network planning

MANUAL

CLKSRC

Choose the configured


clock reference source
when the MODE is set to
MANUAL.

Network planning

GPS

SRCNO

No. of the clock source


specified by the user
manually

Network planning

Parameter

Description
The system clock works
in the following three
modes:
l AUTO: The system
automatically selects
the clock reference
source based on the
priority and
availability of clock
reference sources.

MODE

l MANUAL: The user


configures a clock
reference source.
l FREE: The system is
working in free-run
mode and does not
track any clock
reference source.

Time Source Parameters


You need to select the proper time source and configure it based on the actual network planning.
l

3-10

Table 3-8 lists the types of the time source. The relevant command is as follows: SET
TIMESRC.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 3-8 Type of clock source


Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

Network planning

NTP

Time source type of the


BS. The following types
are supported:
TIMESRC

l NTP: network time


protocol
l GPS: globe
positioning system
l User: user-defined
time

When the NTP time source is chosen, you need to configure the NTP client information.
Table 3-9 lists the parameters. The relevant command is as follows: ADD NTPC.
Table 3-9 Time source parameters
Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

IP

IP address of the NTP


server

Network planning

192.168.88.168

PORT

No. of the NTP server.


The No. ranges from 123
to 5999, and from 6100 to
65534.

Network planning

123

SYNCCYCLE

Time synchronization
period of the NTP. The
value ranges from 1
minute to 525600
minutes.

Network planning

Network planning

ON

Periodical time
synchronization switch

SYNCSWITC
H

l On: It indicates that


the NTP client
performs time
synchronization in the
time synchronization
period when
periodical time
synchronization is
enabled.
l Off: It indicates that
periodical time
synchronization is
disabled.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-11

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 3-10 lists the time zone parameters. The relevant command is as follows: SET TZ.

Table 3-10 Time source parameters


Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

ZONET

Time zone of an NE

Network planning

GMT+0900

DST

Used to indicate whether


the daylight saving time
(DST) is used in an NE

Network planning

YES

Network planning

DATEWEEK

DST starting mode of an


NE There are three modes:
l WEEK: It specifies a
day in a specified week
of a month.
SM

l DATE: It specifies a
month and a day.
l DATEWEEK: It
specifies a week after a
specified month and
day.

SMONTH

The month when the DST


of an NE starts

Network planning

JAN (January)

SDAY

DST starting date of an NE.

Network planning

SWSEQ

The week when the DST of


an NE starts

Network planning

FIRST

SWEEK

The day in a week when the


DST of an NE starts

Network planning

MON (Monday)

ST

DST starting time of an NE.


The precision is minute and
it does not support the
precision of second.

Network planning

00:00:00

Network planning

DATEWEEK

DST ending mode of an


NE. There are three modes:
l WEEK: It specifies a
day in a specified week
of a month.
EM

l DATE: It specifies a
month and a day.
l DATEWEEK: It
specifies a week after a
specified month and
day.

3-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

EMONTH

DST ending month of an


NE

Network planning

DEC (December)

EDAY

DST ending date of an NE

Network planning

31

EWSEQ

DST ending week of an NE

Network planning

LAST

EWEEK

The day in a week when the


DST of an NE ends

Network planning

SUN (Sunday)

ET

DST ending time of an NE.


The precision is minute and
it does not support the
precision of second.

Network planning

23:59:59

TO

DST deviation time of an


NE. The DST deviation
time must be an integral
multiple of 15 minutes.

Network planning

3.4.2 Preparing Hardware Parameters


This section describes how to configure the BS hardware information, which includes the board
information, RRU information, and rate and convergence mode of CPRI ports.

Default Hardware Configuration


By default, the cabinet, BBU subrack, mandatory boards, and three RRUs are configured before
the delivery. In MML mode, if the actual configuration is different from the default
configuration, modify the configuration data based on the actual configuration. For details on
the configuration guide, see 5.4.3 Configuring Hardware Parameters .
l

The default configuration of boards is as follows:


By default, the BMPT is installed in slot 7.
By default, the BBBI is installed in slot 3.
By default, the UPEU is installed in slot 19.
By default, the FAN is installed in slot 16.

The default configurations of the RRU are as follows:


ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=1;

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-13

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning


ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=2;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RCN=0, RN="RRU-00";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, RCN=1, RN="RRU-01";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, RCN=2, RN="RRU-02";

MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=DISABLE;

CAUTION
When more than four boards are configured in slots 0 to 5, two UPEUs need to be configured.

Configuration Data for Boards


Table 3-11 lists the parameters for board configuration. The relevant command is as follows:
ADD BRD.
Table 3-11 Configuration data for boards

3-14

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

CN

No. of the cabinet where the


BBU subrack is installed. It
is set to 0.

Hardware
configuration

SRN

No. of the subrack where a


board is installed. It is set to
0.

Hardware
configuration

BOARDTYPE

Configured type of an
added board

Hardware
configuration

BBI

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

Hardware
configuration

No. of the slot where a


board is installed
l The BMPT can be
installed in slots 6 and 7.
l The BBIa can be
installed in slots 1, 3,
and 5, and the BBIb can
be installed in slots 0 to
5.
l The UTRP can be
installed in slots 0 to 5.

SN

l The FAN module is


installed in slot 16.
l The UPEU can be
installed in slots 18 and
19.
l The USCU can be
installed in slots 4 and 5.
l The UEIU can be
installed in slot 18.

NOTE

The BBBI is categorized into BBIa and BBIb. The BBIa occupies two slots and is not delivered any more.
The BBIb occupies one slot.

Configuration Data for RRUs


l

Table 3-12 lists the parameters for configuring the RRUCHAIN. The relevant command
is as follows: ADD RRUCHAIN.
NOTE

l The RRU3702 supports the chain topology and load balancing topology, the RRU3703 supports
the chain topology, ring topology, and load balancing topology, and the RRU3701C supports
only the chain topology.
l When the head and tail of the load balancing topology are configured on different BBBIs, the
RRUCHAIN fails to be configured if the rates of the CPRI ports on two BBBIs are inconsistent.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-15

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 3-12 Parameters for configuring the RRU topology


Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

RCN

No. of the chain/ring/load


balancing topology. It is
used for identifying a
chain/ring/load balancing
topology. The value
ranges from 0 to 17.

Hardware
configuration

Hardware
configuration

CHAIN

BM

Backup mode of the ring


topology. It supports only
the cold backup mode. It
is valid when TT is set to
RING.

Hardware
configuration

COLD

HCN

No. of the cabinet where


the board connected to the
head of the chain/ring/
load balancing topology
is installed. It is set to 0.

Hardware
configuration

HSRN

No. of the subrack where


the board connected to the
head of the chain/ring/
load balancing topology
is installed. It is set to 0.

Hardware
configuration

HSN

No. of the slot where the


board connected to the
head of the chain/ring/
load balancing topology
is installed. The value
ranges from 0 to 5.
Configure it according to
the actual installation
positions of boards.

Hardware
configuration

HPN

No. of the optical port


where the head of the
chain/ring/load balancing
topology is connected.

Hardware
configuration

Topology type, consisting


of the following:
TT

l CHAIN: chain
topology.
l RING: ring topology.
l BALANCE: load
balancing topology.

3-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

TCN

No. of the cabinet where


the board connected to the
tail of the chain/load
balancing topology is
installed. It is valid only
when TT is set to RING
or BALANCE.

Hardware
configuration

TSRN

No. of the subrack where


the board connected to the
tail of the ring/load
balancing topology is
installed. It is valid only
when TT is set to RING
or BALANCE.

Hardware
configuration

TSN

No. of the slot where the


board connected to the tail
of the ring/load balancing Hardware
topology is installed. It is configuration
valid only when TT is set
to RING or BALANCE.

TPN

No. of the optical port


where the tail of the ring/
load balancing topology
is connected. It is valid
only when TT is set to
RING or BALANCE.

Hardware
configuration

Table 3-13 lists the parameters for configuring the RRU subrack. The relevant command
is as follows: ADD RRU.
Table 3-13 Parameters for configuring the RRU subrack

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

CN

No. of the cabinet where


the RRU is installed. It is
set to 0 by default

Hardware
configuration

SRN

No. of the subrack where


the RRU is installed. The
value ranges from 60 to
77

Hardware
configuration

60

SN

No. of the slot where the


RRU is installed. It is set
to 0 by default

Hardware
configuration

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-17

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

RCN

No. of the RRUCHAIN


where the RRU is
connected. The value
ranges from 0 to 17

Hardware
configuration

RN

Name of the added RRU.


It consists of a maximum
of 11 characters

Customized

RRU01

Rate and Convergence Mode of CPRI Ports


The rate and the convergence mode of the CPRI port need to be modified according to the
maximum rate and convergence mode supported by the optical module. Table 3-14 describes
the parameters. The relevant command is as follows: MOD CPRIINFO.
Table 3-14 Attribute of the CPRI port
Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

CN

No. of the cabinet where the


BBBI is installed. It is set to
0 by default.

Hardware
configuration

SRN

No. of the subrack where


the BBBI is installed. It is
set to 0 by default.

Hardware
configuration

SN

No. of the slot where the


BBBI is installed. The
value ranges from 0 to 5

Hardware
configuration

Hardware
configuration

G245

Rate of the optical port

CPRISPEED

3-18

l G245: The rate is 2.45


Gbit/s. The
convergence of two
optical ports is
supported when the
G245 is configured.
l G384: The rate is 3.84
Gbit/s. The
convergence of two
optical ports or three
optical ports is
supported when the
G384 is configured.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

Network planning

TWO

Convergence mode of the


optical port
l DISABLE: nonconvergence mode.

CPRICONVER
GENCEMODE

l TWO: convergence of
two optical ports. When
the CPRI1 is converged
into the CPRI0, the
CPRI0 transmits and
receives two carriers.
l THREE: Convergence
of three optical ports.
When the CPRI1 and
CPRI1 are converged
into the CPRI0, the
CPRI0 transmits and
receives three carriers.

3.4.3 Preparing Transmission Parameters


This section describes major transmission parameters. You need to prepare the data based on
the actual transmission networking.
Transmission parameters consist of Ethernet port parameters, DEVIPs, logical port parameters,
OM channel (OMCH) information, IP path information, signaling channel (SIGCH)
information, route information, and VLAN information.
NOTE

When configuring transmission parameters, the CN, SRN, and SN in each command must be identical.
l CN: It indicates the No. of the cabinet where the board with the Ethernet port is installed. It is set to 0.
l SRN: It indicates the No. of the subrack where the board with Ethernet port is installed. It is set to 0.
l SN: It indicates the No. of the slot where the board with Ethernet port is installed.
l The configured IP address must be valid address of classes A, B, and C. The IP address cannot be
0.x.x.x or 127.x.x.x.

Attributes of the Ethernet Port


Table 3-15 describes Ethernet port parameters. The relevant command is as follows: SET
ETHPORT.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-19

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 3-15 Ethernet port parameters


Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

PN

No. of the Ethernet port.


The value ranges from 0 to
1.

Network planning

PA

Optical/electrical attribute
of the Ethernet port

Hardware
configuration

COPPER

l COPPER: electrical
port
l FIBER: optical port
l AUTO: automatic
detection. When the
port attribute is set to
AUTO, the system
preferentially binds the
Ethernet port and
optical port.
MTU

It indicates the maximum


Network planning
transmission unit over the
Ethernet port, that is, the
maximum length of the IP
packet (including the IP
header). The default value
is 1500. The recommended
value ranges from 576 to
1500. If the parameter
value is smaller than 576,
the broadcast packets such
as DHCP packets cannot be
received or transmitted.

1500

SPEED

Rate mode of the Ethernet


port. The modes consist of
10 M, 100 M, 1,000 M, and
AUTO.

AUTO

Network planning

The configured rate must


be consistent with the
configuration of the
connected router or switch.
Otherwise, the port cannot
be activated.

3-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

DUPLEX

Duplex mode of the


Ethernet port

Network planning

AUTO

l FULL: Full-duplex
mode
l AUTO: Automatic
negotiation mode
The duplex mode must be
consistent with the
configuration of the
connected router or switch.
Otherwise, the port cannot
be activated.

Device IP Address
The local IP addresses of the OM channel and signaling channel are logical IP addresses. They
must depend on the DEVIP. You must configure the DEVIP before configuring the OM channel,
signaling channel and IP path. Table 3-16 lists the parameters for configuring DEVIPs. The
relevant command is as follows: ADD DEVIP.
Table 3-16 DEVIP
Parameter

Description

Value Source

PT

Type of the physical port


for the transmission port. It
consists of the following:

Hardware
configuration

Example of
Parameter Value
ETH

l PPP: PPP link


l MP: Multi-link PPP
group
l ETH: Ethernet port
l TRUNK: Convergence
group of Ethernet links
l LOOPIF: Loopback
port

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-21

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

PN

Ethernet port that is used as


the transmission port

Network planning

Network planning

172.16.11.19

l The value range of PPP


is 0 to 15.
l The value range of MP
is 0 to 3.
l The value range of ETH
is 0 to 1.
l The value range of
TRUNK is 0 to 1.
l The value range of
LOOPIF is 0 to 3.
IP

MASK

DEVIP of the transmission


port. You are advised to
configure two DEVIPs.
One is used by the OM
channel, and the other is
used by the IP path and
signaling channel.

172.17.11.19

Subnet mask of the DEVIP Network planning


configured for a port

255.255.255.0

Logical Port
A logical port is a logical division of physical link resources carried on the logical port. The BS
performs bandwidth management, flow forming, admission control, and congestion control
based on logical ports. Table 3-17 describes the logical port parameters. The ADD
IPLGCPORT command is used.
Table 3-17 Logical port parameters

3-22

Parameter

Description

Source

Example

LPT

It indicates the type of


the logical port. It is set
to USERDEF.

Network plan

USERDEF

LPN

It indicates the No. of


the logical port. The
value ranges from 0 to
7.

Network plan

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Source

Example

PT

It indicates the type of


the physical port to
which the logical port
belongs. It must be
consistent with the
configuration of the
ADD DEVIP
command.

Network plan

ETH

PN

It indicates the No. of


the physical port to
which the logical port
belongs. It must be
consistent with the
configuration of the
ADD DEVIP
command.

Network plan

TXBW

Transmission
bandwidth. It indicates
the maximum uplink
bandwidth of the
logical port. It cannot
exceed the available
uplink bandwidth of the
transmission network.
It is used for the
admission bandwidth of
uplink transmission and
the bandwidth of
transmit flow forming.

Network plan

10,000

Network plan

10,000

It is recommended to be
set to the available
uplink bandwidth of the
transmission network.
RXBW

Receive bandwidth. It
indicates the maximum
downlink bandwidth of
the logical port. It
cannot exceed the
available downlink
bandwidth of the
transmission network.
It is used for the
downlink admission
bandwidth.
It is recommended to be
set to the available
uplink bandwidth of the
transmission network.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-23

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Source

Example

TXCBS

It indicates the
committed burst size
when data is
transmitted on the
logical port. Set it based
on the bandwidth
planned by the network.

Network plan

20,000

Network plan

20,000

It is recommended to be
two times of the
transmit bandwidth.
TXEBS

It indicates the
excessive burst size
when data is
transmitted on the
logical port. Set it based
on the bandwidth
planned by the network.

OMCH
The OMCH is the remote maintenance channel between the BS and the M2000. It is used for
remote BS maintenance in the equipment room. Table 3-18 describes the OMCH parameters.
The relevant command is as follows: ADD OMCH.
Table 3-18 OMCH

3-24

Example of Parameter
Value

Parameter

Description

Value Source

LOCALIP

Local IP address of the


OM channel. It is used
when the connection
between the BS and the
M2000 is set up. The
local IP address and
DEVIP of the OM
channel must belong to
the same network
segment.

Network
planning

172.17.11.19

LOCALMASK

Subnet mask of the local


IP address of the OM
channel. It cannot be
255.255.255.255.

Network
planning

255.255.255.0

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Example of Parameter
Value

Parameter

Description

Value Source

PEERIP

Peer IP address of the OM


channel. It is consistent
with the IP address of the
M2000.

Network
planning

192.168.10.105

PEERMASK

Subnet mask of the peer


IP address of the OM
channel

Network
planning

255.255.255.255

BRT

It indicates whether to
add a route for the remote
maintenance channel.

Network
planning

NO

l When this parameter


is set to YES, one
route is automatically
added to the remote
maintenance channel
according to the
parameter configured
by the user.
l When this parameter
is set to NO, you must
run the ADD IPRT to
add one route to the
remote maintenance
channel if the
LOCALIP and the
PEERIP are not on
the same network
segment and the
network segment
containing the device
IP address does not
cover that containing
the peer IP address.
DSTIP

Destination IP address of
the route, that is, IP
address of the M2000

Network
planning

192.168.10.105

MASK

Subnet mask

Network
planning

255.255.255.255

RT

Route type

Network
planning

NEXTHOP

l NEXTHOP: Mode of
the next hop.
l IF: Mode of exit
interface.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-25

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Example of Parameter
Value

Parameter

Description

Value Source

ITFT

Port type, including PPP


(PPP Link) and MP
(Multi-link PPP
Group). It is valid when
RT is set to IF.

Network
planning

PPP

ITFNO

Port No. The value ranges


from 0 to 15. It is valid
when RT is set to IF.

Network
planning

NEXTHOPIP

Next-hop IP address of a
route. It is valid when
RT is set to NEXTHOP.

Network
planning

172.17.11.1

PREF

VLAN priority. It is valid


when the route is bound.
The value ranges from 1
to 255. A smaller value
indicates a higher
priority.

Network
planning

60

IP Path
The IP path is a transmission channel, which is used to transmit traffic data between the BS and
the ASN-GW. Table 3-19 describes the IP path parameters. The relevant command is as follows:
ADD IPPATH.
Table 3-19 IP path parameters

3-26

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

PATHID

Path No. It is used to


identify an IP path.

Network planning

LPN

It indicates the logical


port number of the IP
path.

Network planning

LOCALIP

Local IP address of the


IP path, that is, the
DEVIP

Network planning

172.16.11.19

PEERIP

Peer IP address of the


IP path, that is, the IP
address of the ASNGW

Network planning

172.16.41.10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

PATHTYPE

Type of the IP path,


including QoS and
ANY.

Network planning

QOS

l QoS indicates
Quality of Service
(QoS) of the
services carried on
the IP path.
l ANY indicates any
QoS service carried
on the IP path.
DSCP

Differentiated Services
Code Point (DSCP) of
the services carried on
the IP path. When the
type of the IP path is
QoS, this parameter
must be configured.
The value ranges from
0 to 63. A larger value
indicates a higher
priority.

Network planning

48

PATHCHK

Used to indicate
whether the IP path
needs to be pinged.

Network planning

Enable

Network planning

100

When it is set to
Enable, the channel
detection function is
enabled. The
connectivity of the IP
path can be checked by
running the ping
command. The
detection fails if the
ping function is
disabled on the firewall
of the transmission
network .
NSPID

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Operator ID. It is
configured when the
wholesale service is
applied. The value 0
indicates that the
wholesale service is not
supported.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-27

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Signaling Channel
The signaling channel is used for signaling exchange between the BS and the ASN-GW. Table
3-20 describes the signaling channel parameters. The relevant command is as follows: ADD
SIGCH.
Table 3-20 Signaling channel parameters
Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

LOCALIP

Local IP address of the


signaling channel. It
must belong to the same
network segment as the
local IP address of the
IP path does.

Network planning

172.16.11.123

PEERIP

Peer IP address of the


signaling channel, that
is, the IP address of the
ASN-GW

Network planning

172.16.41.10

Route Information
The route information includes the route between the BS and the M2000 and the route between
the BS and the ASN-GW. After the OMCH and IP path are configured, you must configure
corresponding routes so that data can be transferred to the destination normally. Table 3-21
describes the route parameters. The relevant command is as follows: ADD IPRT.
Table 3-21 Route parameters
Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

DSTIP

Destination IP address
of a route.

Network planning

M2000 IP:
192.168.10.105

l The destination IP
address of the route
from the BS to the
M2000 uses the IP
address of the
M2000.

GWIP: 172.16.41.10

l The destination IP
address of the route
from the BS to the
ASN-GW uses the
IP address of the
GW.

3-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

MASK

Subnet mask. It
specifies the
destination subnet that
the IP packet reaches.

Network planning

255.255.255.255

RTTYPE

Route type

Network planning

NEXTHOP

l NEXTHOP: Mode
of the next hop.
l IF: Mode of exit
interface.
PT

Port type, including


PPP and MP

Network planning

PPP

PN

Port No.

Network planning

NEXTHOPIP

Next-hop IP address of
a route.

Network planning

172.17.11.1

Priority of the entries in


the routing table. A
smaller value indicates
a higher priority

Network planning

PREF

172.16.11.1
60

Next-Hop VLAN Mapping


In VLAN networking, the mapping between the next-hop IP address and the VLAN is added so
that the OM data and traffic data is transmitted on different VLANs. Table 3-22 describes the
parameters. The relevant command is as follows: ADD VLANMAP.
Table 3-22 VLAN mapping parameters

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

NEXTHOPIP

Next-hop IP address of
a specified VLAN to
which the data is
transmitted

Network planning

172.16.11.1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-29

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

MODE

Mode to add the VLAN

Network planning

VLANCLASS

l SINGLEVLAN: It
indicates that a
VLAN Tag is added
using the
configured VLAN
ID and VLAN
priority.
l VLANCLASS:
When
VLANMODE is
set to
SINGLEVLAN,
the IP address of
next hop is mapped
to the VLAN group.
The DSCP of the IP
packets is mapped
into the VLAN Tag.
VLANID

ID of the selected
VLAN when
VLANMODE is set to
SINGLEVLAN

Network planning

VLANPRI

VLAN priority. For


single VLAN, all
priorities of the VLANs
must be the same.

Network planning

VLANGROUPNO

No. of the selected


VLAN group when
VLANMODE is set to
VLANCLASS

Network planning

VLAN Priority Mapping


In VLAN networking, if VLAN grouping and data priority processing are required, you need to
configure VLAN priority mapping. Table 3-23 describes the parameters. The relevant command
is as follows: ADD VLANCLASS.

3-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 3-23 VLAN group parameters


Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

VLANGROUPNO

Used to identify a
VLAN group. A
maximum of four
VLAN groups can be
configured.

Network planning

TRAFFICTYPE

Service type. Different


types of service data
have different VLANs.

Network planning

USERDATA

l USERDATA: user
data
l SIG: signaling data
l OM_HIGH: high
priority data for
maintenance
l OM_LOW: low
priority data for
maintenance
l OTHER: other data
SRVPRI

DSCP priority of user


data. The value 63
indicates the highest
priority

Network planning

63

VLANID

ID of a VLAN to be
added to a VLAN group

Network planning

VLANPRI

VLAN priority. A
larger value indicates a
higher priority

Network planning

3.4.4 Preparing R6 Link Detection Parameters (Optional)


The R6 link detection involves signaling-plane detection and user-plane detection. If the
signaling-plane detection and user-plane detection are required, relevant parameters need be
configured after the transmission links are configured.

Parameters for R6 Signaling-Plane Detection


The R6 signaling-plane detection is used for checking and reporting the faults on the signaling
plane (signaling channel). Table 3-24 lists the parameters. The relevant command is as follows:
MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-31

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 3-24 Parameters for signaling-plane detection


Paramet
er
CCMR6S
WITCH

Description

Value
Source

Example of
Parameter
Value

Network
planning

MSGANDC
YCLE

Network
planning

Network
planning

R6 Check Switch refers to the switch for R6


signaling-plane detection. By default, it is set
to off.
l OFF: It indicates that R6 signaling-plane
detection is disabled.
l MESSAGE-TRIGGERED: It indicates the
message-triggered detection. In network
entry, handover, or idle mode, the BS sends
a request to the ASN-GW. If the ASN-GW
does not respond to the request when the
number of retransmission times exceeds
the specified threshold, fault detection is
started.
NOTE
Generally, you are advised not to modify the
threshold. If you need to modify the threshold,
contact Huawei technical support engineers.

l CYCLE: It indicates that the BS


periodically sends requests to the ASNGW. The detection period is one minute. If
no response is received for three
consecutive times, the BS starts fault
detection.
l MSGANDCYCLE: It indicates that
message-triggered detection and periodical
detection are enabled. Message-triggered
detection guarantees timely startup of fault
detection. Periodical detection
supplements leaks in link detection without
signaling.
CCMCH
ECKCYC
LE

R6 Check Interval: indicates the period of R6


signaling-plane detection after link
interruption detection is started.
The recommended value is 3 seconds.

CCMCH
ECKTHR
ES

R6 Check Time Threshold: indicates that the


R6 signaling plane is faulty when the number
of times there is no response from the ASNGW to the BS fault detection message exceeds
the threshold. In this case, the BS blocks the
carrier and reports the alarm.
The recommended value is three times.

3-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Paramet
er

Description

CCMRES
UMECH
ECKCYC
LE

R6 Recovery Check Interval: indicates the


interval of sending the fault recovery detection
messages after the BS confirms the R6
signaling-plane fault.

Value
Source

Example of
Parameter
Value

Network
planning

Network
planning

Network
planning

600

The recommended value is 3 seconds.


CCMRES
UMECH
ECKTHR
ES

R6 Recovery Check Time Threshold: After


confirming the R6 signaling-plane fault, the
BS sends the fault recovery detection message
to the ASN-GW. Within the interval specified
in R6 Check Reset BTS Interval, if the
number of times that the BS receives responses
to fault recovery messages from the ASN-GW
exceeds the threshold, the R6 signaling-plane
fault is cleared.
The recommended value is five times.

CCMRES
ETBSTI
ME

R6 Check Reset BTS Interval: indicates the


interval of BS resetting after the BS confirms
the R6 signaling-plane fault. This requires that
CCMRESETBSTIME is larger than
CCMRESUMECHECKCYCLE multiplied
by CCMRESUMECHECKTHRES.
The recommended value is 600 seconds.

Parameters for R6 User-Plane Detection


The R6 user-plane detection is used for checking and reporting the faults on the user plane (IP
path). Table 3-25 lists the parameters. The relevant command is as follows: ADD UPDT.
Table 3-25 Parameters for R6 user-plane detection
Paramet
er

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Description

Value
Source

Example of
Parameter
Value

LOCALI
P

Local IP address of the IP path

Network
planning

172.16.11.12
3

GWIP

IP address of the GW to which the BS is


connected

Network
planning

172.16.41.10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-33

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Paramet
er
TUS

Description
TUS is User-plane Silence. The silence
detection scheme is implemented in the
following method: When the BS does not
receive the user-plane data in TUS, fault
detection is started. When the fault detection
is triggered, the system resets TUU. The
silence detection can reduce the number of
detection messages sent by the BS to the GW.

Value
Source

Example of
Parameter
Value

Network
planning

50

Network
planning

600

Network
planning

Network
planning

The value ranges from 20 second to 300


seconds.
TUU

TUU is User-plane Unsilence. When the


silence detection runs properly, the BS detects
the GW for a long period (TUU). When the
link from the GW to the BS is normal, silence
detection cannot detect the exceptions from
the BS to the GW. Therefore, the user-plane
unsilence detection needs to be performed on
the GW. If the BS detects user-plane data in
multiple TUSs, check whether the user-plane
detection is triggered when the TUU times out.
If the user-plane detection is not triggered,
trigger it.
The value ranges from 60 second to 1200
seconds.

TUP

TUP is User-plane Period. When the BS


starts the fault detection and does not receive
the detection response, it restarts the fault
detection after the specified period.
The value ranges from 1 second to 30 seconds.

TUN

TUN is User-plane Number. When the BS


starts the fault detection and does not receive
the detection response, it restarts the fault
detection. TUN defines the maximum number
of fault detection times.
If there is no response when the number of
fault detection times reaches the maximum,
the system is regarded to be faulty. Before the
system is regarded to be faulty, stop detecting
if there is a response during any detection.
The value ranges from 1 time to 20 times.

3-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Paramet
er
TURP

Description
TURP is User-plane Resuming Period.
After the user plane is regarded to be faulty,
the BS detects the faults in the period specified
by the TURP.

Value
Source

Example of
Parameter
Value

Network
planning

Network
planning

The value ranges from 0 second to 60 seconds.


TURN

TURN is User-plane Resuming Number.


After the user plane is regarded to be faulty,
the BS detects the faults in the period specified
by the TURP. When the result is normal after
the detection is performed for TURN times,
the faults are rectified.
The value ranges from 1 time to 20 times.

3.4.5 Preparing Radio Parameters


This section describes radio parameters to be configured during the deployment.

Sector Information
Table 3-26 describes the sector parameters. The relevant command is as follows: ADD
SECTOR.
Table 3-26 Sector parameters
Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

SECTORID

ID of a sector

Network planning

TXANTNUM

Number of transmit
antennas

Network planning

RXANTNUM

Number of receive
antennas

Network planning

NOTE

l When both TXANTNUM and RXANTNUM are 4, it indicates that four transmit antennas and four
receive antennas are used. Thus, ANTBITMAP must be 4ANT.
l When both TXANTNUM and RXANTNUM are 2, it indicates that two transmit antennas and two
receive antennas are used.
l For the RRU3702, ANTBITMAP must be 2ANT_0 or 2ANT_1.
l For the RRU3703, ANTBITMAP must be 2ANT_0, 2ANT_1, or 2ANT_2.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-35

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Basic Information About Carriers


Table 3-27 describes the parameters for the basic information about carriers. The relevant
command is as follows: ADD CARRIERBASICINFO.
Table 3-27 Basic information about carriers
Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

SECTORID

Sector ID

Network planning

CARRIERID

Carrier ID

Network planning

RCN

ID of the chain, ring, or


load balancing topology

Customized

Customized

HEAD

Used to assign a carrier


to the head or tail of the
chain, ring, or load
balancing topology.
For an initial
configuration, a carrier
can be assigned only to
the head of the chain or
ring topology, the head
and tail of the load
balancing topology.

RCNPOS

3-36

CENTRALFREQ
UENCY

Central frequency of a
carrier. The unit is kHz.

Network planning

2550000

BANDWIDTH

Carrier bandwidth. It
can be 5 MHz, 7 MHz,
or 10 MHz.

Network planning

10M

DLZONETYPE

Type of the downlink


zone. For details, see
Table 3-28.

Network planning

PUSC_1/3

ULZONETYPE

Type of the uplink zone.


For details, see Table
3-28.

Network planning

PUSC_1/3

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

Network planning

29_18

Network planning

Network planning

Subframe ratio of the


number of downlink
symbols to the number
of uplink symbols.

SUBFRAMERA
TIO

The sum of downlink


symbols and uplink
symbols can be 47, 46,
or 33, and 33 is only
applicable to the
channel with a
bandwidth of 7 MHz.
l 35_12
l 32_15
l 29_18
l 26_21
l 31_15
l 13_33
l 21_12

DLSEGMENTN
O

ID of a segment. It is
used for identifying the
segment used by a
carrier. A segment is a
set of subchannels that
are available. One
segment corresponds to
a sector.
The value ranges from 0
to 2.

CDMAGROUPS
TART

Start bit of the CDMA


code, that is, the first
available CDMA code
bit.
The value ranges from 0
to 239.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-37

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

Network planning

370

Equivalent isotropic
transmit power of a BS.
The unit is 0.1 dBm.
l For the RRU3702
operating at 2.3 GHz
and 2.5 GHz, the
EIRP ranges from
200 to 400.
l For the RRU3702
operating at 3.5
GHz, the EIRP
ranges from 184 to
384.

EIRP

l For the RRU3701C


operating at 3.5
GHz, the EIRP
ranges from 250 to
370.
l For other RRUs, the
EIRP ranges from
280 to 400.
ANTBITMAP

It is used to divide the


RF channels of the RRU
into multiple groups.

Network planning

2ANT_0

PREAMBLEIND
EX

Index of the
PREAMBLE
modulation sequence.
The value ranges from 0
to 113. The specific
value depends on the
value of
DLSEGMENTNO.

Network planning

EIRXPIR

Equivalent isotropic
receive power at the
stage of initial ranging.
The unit is dBm.

Network planning

-45

The relations between DLSEGMENTNO and PREAMBLEINDEX are as follows:


If the value of DLSEGMENTNO is 0, the value of PREAMBLEINDEX ranges from
0 to 31.
If the value of DLSEGMENTNO is 1, the value of PREAMBLEINDEX ranges from
32 to 63.

3-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

If the value of DLSEGMENTNO is 2, the value of PREAMBLEINDEX ranges from


64 to 95.
If the value of PREAMBLEINDEX is greater than 95, the ratio between
PREAMBLEINDEX and DLSEGMENTNO must be: [(PREAMBLEINDEX - 96)
% 3] = DLSEGMENTNO.
l

Requirement for ratio of bandwidth to subframe.


The ratios of bandwidth to subframe on all carriers borne by the same BBBI must be
the same.
The ratios of bandwidth to subframe on all carriers borne by the same RRU must be the
same.

Table 3-28 Relations between the zone type and the bandwidth
BANDWIDT
H

DLSEGMEN
TNO

DLZONE

ULZONE

5 MHz

0/1/2

PUSC_ALL

PUSC_ALL

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_ALL

PUSC_ALL

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_ALL

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_ALL

PUSC_ALL

PUSC_1/2

PUSC_1/2

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_ALL

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_ALL

PUSC_ALL

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_ALL

7 MHz

10 MHz

10 MHz

0/1/2

0/1

License
During the deployment, you need to activate the license function of the carrier and grant available
bandwidth to the BS. Table 3-29 describes the license parameters. The relevant command is as
follows: MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO. For details about how to activate other functions,
see the Feature Configuration Guide.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-39

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 3-29 License parameters


Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

BASIC

It is the control item for basic


functions of a carrier. If it is
set to OFF, you cannot
activate the carrier.

Network planning

ON

BANDWIDT
H

It is the bandwidth control


item, which restricts the
available carrier bandwidth
for the BS. Configure this
parameter based on the actual
bandwidth of a carrier.

Network planning

10 MHz

ETHCS

It is the control item for the


convergence function of the
Ethernet. If this function is
disabled, the carrier does not
support the convergence
function of the Ethernet.

Network planning

ON

MOBILITY

It is the control item for the


mobility feature. If this
function is disabled, the
carrier does not support the
mobility feature and MS
handovers.

Network planning

ON

TWOANTEN
NAMIMO

It is the control item for the


two-antenna MIMO function.
If this function is disabled, the
carrier does not support the
two-antenna MIMO function.

Network planning

ON

Network planning

ON

Network planning

ON

FOURANTE
NNAMIMO

AIRITFENC
RYPT

3-40

It is the control item for the


four-antenna MIMO function.
If this function is disabled, the
carrier does not support the
four-antenna MIMO function.
NOTE
When there are four transmit
antennas and four receive
antennas for the DBS3900
WiMAX sectors, the fourantenna MIMO function is
supported.

It is the control item for data


encryption over the air
interface. If this function is
disabled, the carrier does not
support data encryption over
the air interface.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

WHOLESAL
E

It is the control item for the


wholesale function. If this
function is disabled, the BS
does not support the
wholesale function.

Network planning

ON

VOIPENHA
NCE

It is the control item for VoIP


enhancement function. If this
function is disabled, the
carrier does not support
dynamic service flows and
PHS.

Network planning

ON

Network planning

ON

Network planning

ON

BEAMFORM
ING

ULENHANC
EMENT

It is the control item for the


beamforming function. If this
function is disabled, the
carrier does not support the
beamforming function.
NOTE
When there are four transmit
antennas and four receive
antennas for the DBS3900
WiMAX sectors, the
beamforming function is
supported.

It is the control item for the


uplink enhancement function.
If this function is disabled, the
carrier does not support the
uplink 2Tx function and
uplink 64 QAM.

Carrier Block Flag


When activating a carrier, you need to change the carrier block flag to Unblocked. Table
3-30 describes the parameters. The relevant command is as follows: MOD
CARRIERBLOCKFLAG.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-41

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 3-30 Carrier block flag


Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

BLOCKFLA
G

It indicates the carrier


block flag. By default,
a new carrier is
blocked. You need to
set this parameter to
Unblocked so that the
carrier can be
activated.

Network planning

Unblocked

Frame Information About Carriers


When configuring the frame information about carriers, you need to modify FCHRCI (Fch
Indicates The Time of Dlmap Coding) according to the plan, as shown in Table 3-31. The
relevant command is as follows: MOD CARRIERFRAMEINFO.
Table 3-31 FCHRCI
Parameter

FCHRCI

Description
It indicates the number
of times of uplink and
downlink MAP
recoding. If the value
is more than 0, the
transmission quality
over the air interface
can be improved when
the same information
is coded for many
times. In addition,
more bandwidth
resources over the air
interface are occupied.

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

Network planning

NO-REPETITION

l NOREPETITION:
Coded once
l REPETITION-2:
Coded twice
l REPETITION-4:
Coded four times
l REPETITION-6:
Coded six times

3-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

FCHCI

It indicates the DLMAP coding mode.


The MS determines
the DL-MAP coding
mode according to the
value of received
FCHCI. The FEC
types that correspond
to the FCHCI
parameter are as
follows:

Network planning

DLMAP-CTC

Network planning

COMPRESS_1

l If the value of
FCHCI is
DLMAP-CC, the
FEC type is
QPSKCC1/2.
l If the value of
FCHCI is
DLMAP-CTC, the
FEC type is
QPSKCTC1/2.
It indicates the type of
UL-MAP or DLMAP.
l NORMAL
(Normal DLMAP)

MAPTYPE

l COMPRESS_1
(Compressed DLMAP)
l COMPRESS_2
(Compressed MAP
+SUB MAP in 1st
Zone)
l COMPRESS_3
(Compressed MAP
+SUB MAP in All
Zone)

Zone Information About Carriers


You need to configure uplink and downlink zone information based on the actual network
planning. The zone information consists of the indication and permutation base of the zone. The
permutation base of the zone is used to associate the mapping from the sub carrier to the sub
channel. It ensures that the sub channels with the same sequence of the sectors that use different
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-43

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

permutation bases contain different sub carriers. Then, the interference between sectors is
random.
Table 3-32 describes the parameters. The relevant command is as follows: MOD
CARRIERZONEINFO.
Table 3-32 Zone information
Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

DLZONENUM

It indicates the
number of downlink
zones.

Network planning

Network planning
l Bit 2 (bit2:
bandamc) and bit
6 (bit6:
bandamcall) of
the lowest byte of
DLZONEIND
cannot be set to
1
simultaneously.

Downlink zone type


indication
l Either bit 0 (bit 0:
pusc) or bit 3 (bit
3: puscall) of the
lowest byte of
DLZONEIND
must be set to 1.
DLZONEIND

3-44

DL2NDSTARTSY
MBOL

Start symbol of the


second zone in the
downlink.

Network planning

13

DL2NDZONESCH
NUM

Number of
subchannels in the
second zone in the
downlink.

Network planning

DLPUSCPERMBA
SE

Permutation base of
the downlink PUSC
ZONE

Network planning

DLPUSCALLPER
MBASE

Permutation base of
the downlink PUSC
ALL ZONE

Network planning

DLFUSCPERMBA
SE

Permutation base of
the downlink FUSC
ZONE

Network planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

DLPUSCSTCPERM
BASE

Permutation base of
the downlink PUSC
STC ZONE

Network planning

DLPUSCALLSTCPERMBASE

Permutation base of
the downlink PUSC
ALL STC ZONE

Network planning

DLPUSCALLPRBS
ID

Pseudo-random
binary sequence ID
of the PUSC All
STC zone in the
downlink. It
indicates part of the
initial status of the
scrambler of the
downlink zone
(excluding the first
downlink zone and
the AAS zone
supporting diversity
MAP).

Network planning

DLFUSCPRBSID

Pseudo-random
binary sequence ID
of the FUSC zone in
the downlink. It
indicates part of the
initial status of the
scrambler of the
downlink zone
(excluding the first
downlink zone and
the AAS zone
supporting diversity
MAP).

Network planning

DLPUSCSTCPRBSI
D

Pseudo-random
binary sequence ID
of the PUSC STC
zone in the
downlink. It
indicates part of the
initial status of the
scrambler of the
downlink zone
(excluding the first
downlink zone and
the AAS zone
supporting diversity
MAP).

Network planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-45

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

3-46

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

DLPUSCALLSTCP
RBSID

Pseudo-random
binary sequence ID
of the PUSC All
STC zone in the
downlink. It
indicates part of the
initial status of the
scrambler of the
downlink zone
(excluding the first
downlink zone and
the AAS zone
supporting diversity
MAP).

Network planning

ULZONENUM

number of uplink
zones.

Network planning

ULZONEIND

Uplink zone
indication. Bit 1
(bit2: bandamc) and
bit 3 (bit6:
bandamcall) of the
lowest byte of
ULZONEIND
cannot be set to 1
simultaneously.

Network planning

UL2NDSTARTSY
MBOL

Start symbol of the


second zone in the
uplink.

Network planning

UL2NDZONESCH
NUM

Number of
subchannels in the
second zone in the
uplink.

Network planning

ULPUSCPERMBA
SE

Permutation base of
the uplink PUSC
ZONE

Network planning

ULPUSCALLPER
MBASE

Permutation base of
the uplink PUSC
ALL ZONE

Network planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

CAUTION
l If all subchannels of the first downlink zone (DLZONENUM is 1) are used, bit 0 to bit 2 of
the lowest byte of DLZONEIND must be set to 0.
l If some sub channels of the first downlink zone (DLZONENUM is 1) are used, bit 3 to bit
6 of the lowest byte of DLZONEIND must be set to 0.
l If two downlink zones are used simultaneously (DLZONENUM is 2), you need to configure
only some subchannels for the first downlink zone.
l If two downlink zones are used simultaneously (DLZONENUM is 2), you need to configure
all subchannels for the second downlink zone.
l If two downlink zones are used simultaneously (DLZONENUM is 2), bit 0 of the lowest
byte of DLZONEIND must be set to 1.
l If two downlink zones are used simultaneously (DLZONENUM is 2), bit 3 to bit 6 of the
lowest byte of DLZONEIND cannot be set to 0 simultaneously.
l If all sub channels of the first uplink zone (ULZONENUM is 1) are used, bit 0 to bit 1 of
the lowest byte of ULZONEIND must be set to 0.
l If some sub channels of the first uplink zone (ULZONENUM is 1) are used, bit 2 and bit 3
of the lowest byte of ULZONEIND must be set to 0.
l If two uplink zones are used simultaneously (ULZONENUM is 2), some sub channels of
the first uplink zone can be used.
l If two uplink zones are used simultaneously (ULZONENUM is 2), all sub channels of the
second uplink zone can be used.
l If two uplink zones are used simultaneously (ULZONENUM is 2), bit 0 of the lowest byte
of ULZONEIND must be set to 1.
l If two uplink zones are used simultaneously (ULZONENUM is 2), bit 2 to bit 3 of the lowest
byte of ULZONEIND cannot be set to 0 simultaneously.
l If two downlink zones are used simultaneously and the second zone is stc zone, the number
of symbols used by the second zone cannot be less than 4.

Mobility Capability
Mobility capability means whether a BS supports handover, sleep mode, and idle mode.
Table 3-33 describes the parameters. The relevant command is as follows: MOD
MACCAPABILITY.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-47

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

Table 3-33 Mobility capability of a BS


Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

Network planning

HANDOVER+SLEEP
+IDLE

It indicates whether
handover, sleep mode,
and idle mode are
supported by a BS.
l NO_SUPPORT
l HANDOVER
MOBFEATU
RESUPP

l SLEEP
l HANDOVER
+SLEEP
l IDLE
l HANDOVER
+IDLE
l SLEEP+IDLE
l HANDOVER
+SLEEP+IDLE

3.4.6 Preparing Neighbor Cell Parameters and Trigger Parameters


This section describes neighbor cell parameters and trigger parameters.

Neighbor Cell Relations


Table 3-34 lists the parameters for neighbor cell relations. The relevant command is as follows:
ADD NBR.
Table 3-34 Parameters for neighbor cell relations
Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

CBSID

Central BSID

Network planning

0000-6400-0A00

NBRBSID

Neighbor cell BSID

Network planning

0000-6400-0A0A

Composition of the BSID:

3-48

The BSID is composed of operator ID (24 bits), site ID (16 bits), sector ID (4 bits), and
carrier ID (4 bits), as shown in Figure 3-2.

The most significant bit (MSB) of SITEID is NSP Identifier Flag bit. When the MSB is
set to 1, the BS supports the ND&S function and the value of SITEID ranges from 32768
to 65535. In initial configuration, configure the parameter according to the actual network
planning.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

In BSID, OPERATORID, SITEID, SECTORID, and CARRIERID are decimal


numerals. On the gateway and maintenance terminal, BSID is displayed as a hexadecimal
numeral.
For example, if the operator ID, site ID, sector ID, and carrier ID are 100, 10, 0, and 0
respectively, BSID is displayed as 0000-6400-0A00.

Figure 3-2 Composition of the BSID

Trigger Parameters
Table 3-35 lists the trigger parameters. The relevant command is as follows: ADD
TRIGGER.
Table 3-35 Trigger parameters

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

SECTORID

Sector ID

Network planning

CARRIERID

Carrier ID

Network planning

TRIGGERID

Trigger ID. Each


trigger is configured
with one trigger ID.
The trigger ID is
from 0 to 8.

Network planning

TRIGGERTYPE

Types of measuring
standards for
triggering, which
consists of CINR,
RSSI, and RTD

Network planning

CINR

TRIGGERFUNC
TION

Triggering mode of
the trigger

Network planning

TRIGGERACTI
ON

Used to control the


initiated actions
when the MS meets
the triggering
conditions, for
example, to trigger
scanning, scanning
reporting, or
handover

Network planning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-49

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

3 Preparations for Commissioning

3-50

Parameter

Description

Value Source

Example of
Parameter Value

TRIGGERVALU
E

Threshold for
triggering scanning,
scanning reporting,
or handover

Network planning

200

TRIGGERAVER
DURATION

Average time
interval for
measuring the trigger
type of scanning,
scanning reporting,
or handover

Network planning

200

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

About This Chapter


During the GUI-based remote commissioning, engineers configure the BS data through the
WiMAX enhanced configuration system and then start the commissioning tasks to commission
the BS. The RET antenna and auxiliary equipment are commissioned through MML commands.
1.

4.1 Uploading the Software Package


You need to upload the software package of the target version to the M2000 server before
starting a BS commissioning task. If the target versions of the BSs managed by an M2000
are the same, the software package of the target version needs to be uploaded only once.

2.

4.2 Configuring the BS Data


This section describes how to configure the BS data in template or clone mode provided
by the WiMAX enhanced configuration system.

3.

4.3 Commissioning BSs


The M2000 supports automatic BS commissioning and step-by-step BS commissioning.
During the automatic BS commissioning, the M2000 automatically commissions BSs
through automatically creating topologies, upgrading the software, activating the
configuration, and then performing the health check.

4.

4.4 Testing the VSWR of BTS Antennas


Voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) is also referred to standing wave ratio (SWR). You
can test whether the antenna system is correctly installed according to the VSWR of the
system. The M2000 provides the function of remotely testing the VSWR of BTSs in a
centralized manner. Before testing the VSWR, you can set the threshold and display mode
of the test results so that you can find exceptions in time.

5.

4.5 Configuring the BS Information on the ASN-GW


This section describes how to connect the ASN-GW to the downlink of the BS by
configuring BS information on the ASN-GW.

6.

4.6 Configuring the RET Antenna (Optional)


After the Remote Electrical Tilt (RET) antenna is installed, it must be configured correctly
so that it can work normally.

7.

4.7 Configuring Auxiliary Equipment (Optional)

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

A BS can be configured with the OMB, APM30H, EMU, and EMUA based on application
scenarios. In this case, run related commands to add the equipment and configure alarm
parameters.
8.

4-2

4.8 Clearing Alarms


After the OM channel between the M2000 and the BS is set up, you need to check and clear
alarms to ensure successful commissioning. After the commissioning is performed, you
need to check and clear alarms to ensure the normal operation of the BS.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

4.1 Uploading the Software Package


You need to upload the software package of the target version to the M2000 server before starting
a BS commissioning task. If the target versions of the BSs managed by an M2000 are the same,
the software package of the target version needs to be uploaded only once.

Prerequisite
The M2000 client is properly connected to the M2000 server.

Procedure
Step 1 On the M2000 client, choose Software > NE File Transfer.... The NE File Transfer dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 NE File Transfer dialog box

Step 2 Under Basic Info, set the basic information for the uploading.
l Set Direction to From OMC Client to OMC Server.
l If the target BS is DBS3900 WiMAX, set NE Type to DBS3900 WiMAX; if the target BS
is BTS3701B, set NE Type to BTS3701B.
l Set File Type to Software.
Step 3 Under Source Path, click Select and select the path where the software package is stored, for
example, D:\WiMAXVer\Sofrware.
Step 4 In the Select General Parameters dialog box, click OK to upload the software package to the
M2000 server.
----End

4.2 Configuring the BS Data


This section describes how to configure the BS data in template or clone mode provided by the
WiMAX enhanced configuration system.
4.2.1 Overview of Template Mode and Clone Mode
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

This section describes the template mode and clone mode provided by the WiMAX enhanced
configuration system to configure the BS data.
4.2.2 Configuring BTS Data (Template Mode)
This section describes how to configure BTS data in template mode. The M2000 provides
internal BTS data configuration templates containing complete BTS deployment data. You can
quickly complete the initial configuration of a BTS by selecting a template according to the BTS
configuration type and then modifying a small amount of data.
4.2.3 Configuring BTS Data (Clone Mode)
This section describes how to configure the data of a BTS based on the data of a golden BTS.
When the hardware, transmission networking, and planned radio data of a new BTS are the same
as those of the golden BTS, you can clone the configuration data of the golden BTS and then
modify a little data to plan the configuration data of the new BTS. In this way, you can quickly
complete the initial configuration of the new BTS.
4.2.4 Adjusting Configuration Data
This section describes how to add, modify, or delete the configuration data of a BTS using the
WCS.
4.2.5 Checking Data Validity
This section describes how to check data validity. Data validity check mainly involves verifying
that the configuration data of BTSs is normative. This ensures that commands can be issued to
BTSs and then executed on BTSs successfully.

4.2.1 Overview of Template Mode and Clone Mode


This section describes the template mode and clone mode provided by the WiMAX enhanced
configuration system to configure the BS data.

Template Mode
1.6 Typical Configuration Types shows the typical BS configuration types that are classified
according to the application scenarios of the BS. When the configuration types of the BSs are
the same, most configuration data of the BSs is the same. The WiMAX enhanced configuration
system provides templates corresponding to the typical configurations.
During the site deployment, the differentiated data is displayed on the WiMAX enhanced
configuration tab page after the corresponding template is selected. You can modify the data
according to the actual situations at the site. Figure 4-2 shows the data configuration procedure.
For details about how to configure the BS data in template mode, see 4.2.2 Configuring BTS
Data (Template Mode).

4-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Figure 4-2 Configuring the BS data in template mode

NOTE

You need to choose a template according to the configuration type of the BS. The WiMAX enhanced
configuration system provides the templates according to the typical configuration types, as shown in 1.6
Typical Configuration Types.

Clone Mode
Generally, the hardware configuration, transmission networking, and configuration type of the
BSs to be deployed by an operator in an area are the same. In this case, the BS data can be
configured easily in clone mode.
In clone mode, standard configuration data of the golden BS that is applicable to the target BS
is copied to the target BS. Then, differentiated configuration data is displayed on the clone
interface. You need to modify the data according to the actual situations of the BS. The golden
site can be either a virtual site planned in the WiMAX enhanced configuration system or an
actual site in the existing network.
Figure 4-3 shows the data configuration procedure in clone mode. For details about how to
configure the BS data in clone mode, see 4.2.3 Configuring BTS Data (Clone Mode).
Figure 4-3 Configuring the BS data in clone mode

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Remarks on Parameter Filling


When the BS data is configured in template mode or in clone mode, the parameters with a white
background can be set or modified, and the parameters with a gray background cannot be
modified.

4.2.2 Configuring BTS Data (Template Mode)


This section describes how to configure BTS data in template mode. The M2000 provides
internal BTS data configuration templates containing complete BTS deployment data. You can
quickly complete the initial configuration of a BTS by selecting a template according to the BTS
configuration type and then modifying a small amount of data.

Context
Only WiMAX BTSs of V300R003C00 and later versions support the configuration of BTS data
in template mode.
BTS data configuration is classified into typical configuration data and differentiated
configuration data. When configuring BTS data in template mode, you need to modify only the
differentiated data of the BTS.
TIP

l In the creation wizard, the data on the grey background is typical BTS configuration data and cannot
be modified.
l In the creation wizard, the data on the white background is differentiated data and can be modified.
Ensure that the data is complete after you modify it. The system automatically fills in part of the
differentiated data. If you modify the filled-in data, it turns red.
l The WCS provides the functions of copying and pasting multiple configuration records within one
configuration object. This expedites data configuration.
l Copying the contents in a cell: Right-click the cell in which contents need to be copied, and then
choose Copy Cell from the shortcut menu. Right-click another data record corresponding to this
parameter, and then choose Paste Cell from the shortcut menu to edit the data of the cell.
l Copying the record of a whole line: Right-click the data record to be copied, and then choose Copy
Row from the shortcut menu. Click Add to add an empty record, right-click the record, and then
choose Paste Row from the shortcut menu. Then, modify a small amount of data to complete the
data configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WiMAX Enhanced Configuration on the M2000 client to open the
WiMAX Enhanced Configuration main window.
Step 2 In the navigation tree in the left pane, right-click the Planned BTS node, and then choose Create
Planned BTS By Template from the shortcut menu.
Step 3 In the Create Planned BTS By Template dialog box, type the name and ESN of a new BTS,
select the BTS type, version, and data template, and then click Next.
l If the MML command file of the selected version is not downloaded on the current client,
the Download Confirm dialog box is displayed after the version is selected. Click Yes to
download the file.
4-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

l If the ESN of the BTS is not determined during the planning, you do not need to type the
ESN. After the BTS is powered on, its ESN is automatically reported to the M2000.

CAUTION
The installation of BTS hardware strictly corresponds to the hardware parameters. If the BTS
hardware installation is inconsistent with the hardware connection of the selected template, you
need to reconfigure the BTS hardware data after configuring the BTS data in template mode.
For details, see 4.2.4 Adjusting Configuration Data.
Step 4 Configure the device information about the BTS, and then click Next.
Figure 4-4 shows the creation wizard.
l The device information includes Base Parameter, Transmission Parameter, and
Hardware Parameter. Click the corresponding tabs to set the parameters.
If you configure BTS data in template mode, the BTS hardware data cannot be modified. For
details about how to modify the hardware data, see 4.2.4 Adjusting Configuration Data.
l After you click Next, the M2000 checks the accuracy and integrity of the current data. If the
data does not comply with the configuration rules or if the data is incomplete, the M2000
displays the information at the bottom of the creation wizard. You can click the information
to locate the parameters to be modified or added.
Figure 4-4 Creation wizard

Step 5 Configure the radio parameters about the BTS, and then click Next.
After you click Next, the M2000 checks the accuracy and integrity of the current data. If the
data does not comply with the configuration rules or if the data is incomplete, the M2000 displays
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

the information at the bottom of the creation wizard. You can click the information to locate the
parameters to be modified or added.
Step 6 Configure the neighboring cell or trigger of the BTS, and then click Finish.
If the neighboring cell and trigger need to be added, you can click Add in the corresponding
configuration area. The system adds a row of empty record for data configuration. You can
double-click the data cell and then type the configuration data.
After you click Finish, the M2000 checks the accuracy and integrity of the current data. If the
data does not comply with the configuration rules or if the data is incomplete, the M2000 displays
the information at the bottom of the creation wizard. You can click the information to locate the
parameters to be modified or added.
After the data configuration is complete, the BTS is displayed under the Planned BTS node in
the navigation tree.
Step 7 Optional: If you have not opened a project before configuring BTS data, click Save, type a
project name in the displayed Save Project dialog box, and then click OK to save the
configuration data in the project.
NOTE

The M2000 checks the validity of the configuration data only in the project.

----End

4.2.3 Configuring BTS Data (Clone Mode)


This section describes how to configure the data of a BTS based on the data of a golden BTS.
When the hardware, transmission networking, and planned radio data of a new BTS are the same
as those of the golden BTS, you can clone the configuration data of the golden BTS and then
modify a little data to plan the configuration data of the new BTS. In this way, you can quickly
complete the initial configuration of the new BTS.

Context
Only WiMAX BTSs of V300R003C00 and later versions support the function of configuring
the data of a new BTS by cloning that of a golden BTS.
The configuration data of a BTS is classified into typical configuration data and differentiated
configuration data. When you configure the data of a BTS by cloning the data of the golden
BTS, the system displays only the differentiated data for you to modify.

4-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning


TIP

l In the creation wizard, the data on the grey background is typical BTS configuration data and cannot
be modified.
l In the creation wizard, the data on the white background is differentiated data and can be modified.
Ensure that the data is complete after you modify it. The system automatically fills in part of the
differentiated data. If you modify the filled-in data, it turns red.
l The WCS provides the functions of copying and pasting multiple configuration records within one
configuration object. This expedites data configuration.
l Copying the contents in a cell: Right-click the cell in which contents need to be copied, and then
choose Copy Cell from the shortcut menu. Right-click another data record corresponding to this
parameter, and then choose Paste Cell from the shortcut menu to edit the data of the cell.
l Copying the record of a whole line: Right-click the data record to be copied, and then choose Copy
Row from the shortcut menu. Click Add to add an empty record, right-click the record, and then
choose Paste Row from the shortcut menu. Then, modify a small amount of data to complete the
data configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WiMAX Enhanced Configuration on the M2000 client to open the
WiMAX Enhanced Configuration main window.
Step 2 In the navigation tree in the left pane, select a BTS as the golden BTS, right-click the BTS, and
then choose Clone BTS from the shortcut menu.
A golden BTS can be a planned virtual BTS or a BTS on the existing network.

CAUTION
If you select a BTS on the existing network as the golden BTS, you need to ensure that the
configuration data of the BTS is consistent with that on the existing network. To synchronize
the BTS data with that on the existing network, click Refresh.
If the MML command file of the selected version is not downloaded on the current client, the
Download Confirm dialog box is displayed after the version is selected. Click Yes to download
the file.
Step 3 In the Clone BTS dialog box, type the name and ESN of a new BTS, and then click Next.
The type and version of the new BTS configured by cloning the data of the golden BTS are the
same as those of the golden BTS.
If the ESN of the BTS is not determined during the planning, you do not need to type the ESN.
After the BTS is powered on, its ESN is automatically reported to the M2000.

CAUTION
The installation of BTS hardware strictly corresponds to the hardware parameters. If the BTS
hardware installation is inconsistent with the hardware installation of the selected golden BTS,
you need to reconfigure the BTS hardware data after configuring the BTS data by cloning the
data of the golden BTS. For details, see 4.2.4 Adjusting Configuration Data.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-9

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Step 4 Configure the device information about the BTS, and then click Next.
Figure 4-5 shows the creation wizard.
l The device information includes Base Parameter, Transmission Parameter, and
Hardware Parameter. Click the corresponding tabs to set the parameters.
If you configure BTS data in template mode, the BTS hardware data cannot be modified. For
details about how to modify the hardware data, see 4.2.4 Adjusting Configuration Data.
l After you click Next, the M2000 checks the accuracy and integrity of the current data. If the
data does not comply with the configuration rules or if the data is incomplete, the M2000
displays the information at the bottom of the creation wizard. You can click the information
to locate the parameters to be modified or added.
Figure 4-5 Creation wizard

Step 5 Configure the radio parameters about the BTS, and then click Next.
After you click Next, the M2000 checks the accuracy and integrity of the current data. If the
data does not comply with the configuration rules or if the data is incomplete, the M2000 displays
the information at the bottom of the creation wizard. You can click the information to locate the
parameters to be modified or added.
Step 6 Configure the neighboring cell or trigger of the BTS, and then click Finish.
If the neighboring cell and trigger need to be added, you can click Add in the corresponding
configuration area. The system adds a row of empty record for data configuration. You can
double-click the data cell and then type the configuration data.
After you click Finish, the M2000 checks the accuracy and integrity of the current data. If the
data does not comply with the configuration rules or if the data is incomplete, the M2000 displays
the information at the bottom of the creation wizard. You can click the information to locate the
parameters to be modified or added.
4-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

After the data configuration is complete, the BTS is displayed under the Planned BTS node in
the navigation tree.
Step 7 Optional: If you have not opened a project before configuring BTS data, click Save, type a
project name in the displayed Save Project dialog box, and then click OK to save the
configuration data in the project.
NOTE

The M2000 checks the validity of the configuration data only in the project.

----End

4.2.4 Adjusting Configuration Data


This section describes how to add, modify, or delete the configuration data of a BTS using the
WCS.

Prerequisite
Before adjusting the configuration data of a BTS on the existing network, you need to
synchronize the configuration data. For details about how to synchronize the configuration data,
see 9.2 Synchronizing Data on the Existing Network.

Context
The configuration data of a BTS is classified into Hardware Info, Basic Parameter, Transmission
Parameter, Radio Parameter, and Neighboring Carrier Parameter. You can perform the following
operations to adjust the configuration data of the virtual BTSs planned by users and the BTSs
on the existing network.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WiMAX Enhanced Configuration on the M2000 client to open the
WiMAX Enhanced Configuration main window.
Step 2 Select a BTS from the navigation tree in the left pane.
If the MML command file corresponding to the selected BTS has not been downloaded to the
current client yet, you need to click Yes in the displayed Download Confirm dialog box to
download the MML command file.
Step 3 Perform the following operations according to the type of the configuration data to be adjusted:
NOTE

Some parameter tables do not support all data configuration operation items. They support only certain
operation items such as modification, undoing, and export. Only the supported operation items are displayed
in the shortcut menu.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-11

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Configuration Data Type

Operation

Hardware Info

1. Click the Hardware Info. tab.


If the hardware data of the selected BTS exists in the
system, the system displays the graphical structure of
the BTS hardware and the related device information.
NOTE
The graphical structure of only the DBS3900 WiMAX
hardware can be displayed. Therefore, the hardware data of
the BTSs of other types cannot be adjusted through these
operations.

2. Right-click in the hardware configuration area, and


then choose the corresponding item from the shortcut
menu to adjust the hardware data.
You can only add or delete the hardware data of the
BTS. That is, no modification on the hardware data is
allowed. The added data and the deleted data are
highlighted in blue and green respectively. You can
choose Cancel Remove from the shortcut menu to
restore the data that is deleted by accident.
NOTE
You can add hardware data according to the following rules:
l Adding a cabinet when no cabinet is configured yet
l Adding a BBU or an RRU subrack to the cabinet
l Adding a board to a BBU subrack
l Adding an RRU to a RRU subrack or connecting an RRU
to a BBU

Basic Parameter

1. Click the Basic Parameter tab.


2. Select a BTS in the navigation tree.
The parameter tables supported by the BTS and the
configuration data of the BTS are displayed in the data
configuration area.
3. Select a basic information table from the
corresponding drop-down list box, right-click in the
data configuration area, and then choose the
corresponding item from the shortcut menu to add,
modify, or delete the data.
l You can restore the added, modified, or deleted data
by using the Cancel function.
l You can export the configuration data in the current
parameter table of the selected BTS by using the
Export function.

4-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Configuration Data Type

Operation

Transmission Parameter

1. Click the Transmission Parameter tab.


2. Select a BTS in the navigation tree.
The parameter tables supported by the BTS and the
configuration data of the BTS are displayed in the data
configuration area.
3. Select a transmission parameter table from the
corresponding drop-down list box, right-click in the
data configuration area, and then choose the
corresponding item from the shortcut menu to add,
modify, or delete the data.
l You can restore the added, modified, or deleted data
by using the Cancel function.
l You can export the configuration data in the current
parameter table of the selected BTS by using the
Export function.

Radio Parameter

1. Click the Radio Parameter tab.


2. Select a BTS in the navigation tree.
The parameter tables supported by the BTS and the
configuration data of the BTS are displayed in the data
configuration area.
3. Select Parameter Table or Custom Table, and then
select a parameter table from the corresponding dropdown list box.
If Custom Table is selected, you can click Custom,
and then create or modify a parameter table containing
multiple types of configuration data in the displayed
Custom Table dialog box.
4. Right-click in the data configuration area, and then
choose the corresponding item from the shortcut menu
to add, modify, or delete the data.
l You can restore the added, modified, or deleted data
by using the Cancel function.
l You can export the configuration data in the current
parameter table of the selected BTS by using the
Export function.
CAUTION
The modifications on some radio parameters can be issued
successfully only when carriers are blocked. Blocking carriers
leads to service interruption. Therefore, you are advised to
perform this operation when only a small number of subscribers
are online.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-13

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Configuration Data Type

Operation

Neighboring Carrier Parameter 1. Click the Neighboring Carrier Parameter tab.


2. Select a BTS in the navigation tree.
The parameter tables supported by the BTS and the
configuration data of the BTS are displayed in the data
configuration area.
3. Select a sector data record in the Center Carrier
Information area, and then add or delete a neighboring
cell according to the actual requirement.
l Adding a neighboring cell
a. Right-click the Target Carrier and choose
Add from the shortcut menu. The Adding
Neighboring Carrier dialog box is displayed.
b. Select the find type in the Adding Neighboring
Carrier dialog box, and type the content to be
found. Then, click Find. All the neighboring
carrier information is displayed in the left-hand
section of the dialog box.
c. Select one or more neighboring carriers, and
to add the neighbor carrier(s) in
click
the Selected Neighboring Carrier area on the
right of the dialog box.
d. ClickOK to return to the Neighboring Carrier
Parameter tab page.
l Deleting a neighboring cell
Select a neighboring cell record on the Target
Carrier or Source Carrier tab page, and then
perform the following operations:
Unidirectional Delete: The neighboring cell is
deleted from the current tab page only.
Bidirectional Delete: If the neighboring cell
exists on the Target Carrier and Source
Carrier tab pages, it is deleted from both the
tab pages.
Unidirectional Cancel: The change of the
neighboring cell is undone on the current tab
page only.
Bidirectional Cancel: The change of the
neighboring cell is undone on both the Target
Carrier and Source Carrier tab pages.
----End

4-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

4.2.5 Checking Data Validity


This section describes how to check data validity. Data validity check mainly involves verifying
that the configuration data of BTSs is normative. This ensures that commands can be issued to
BTSs and then executed on BTSs successfully.

Prerequisite
BTS data configuration or reconfiguration is complete in an open project. You can also configure
or reconfigure the BTS data and then save the data in a project.

Context
l

When verifying data, the M2000 checks whether the data is valid. By verifying data validity,
you can check whether the value of a configuration parameter is within the valid parameter
range and whether the key data such as SITEID is unique on the entire network.

You can perform this operation to check whether the data of all the BTSs in the current
project or whether the modified BTS data on the live network is valid.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WiMAX Enhanced Configuration on the M2000 client to open the
WiMAX Enhanced Configuration main window.
Step 2 Click Check on the toolbar in the main window. The Check Consistency Report dialog box is
displayed.
Step 3 Select a BTS from the navigation tree in the left pane, and then click Check. The data verification
results are displayed in the right pane.
l If Consistency is displayed as Yes, it indicates that the corresponding data verification is
successful.
l If Consistency is displayed as No, it indicates that the corresponding data verification fails.
In such a case, the cause of the failure is displayed in Error Message. You need to reconfigure
the corresponding data as prompted.
Step 4 Select data records as required, and then click Check.

CAUTION
If the check box before a data record is selected, it indicates that the data modification will be
saved in the project. If the check box before a data record is not selected, and click Undo, the
data modification will be undone.
Figure 4-6 shows the Check Consistency Report dialog box.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-15

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figure 4-6 Check Consistency Report dialog box

----End

4.3 Commissioning BSs


The M2000 supports automatic BS commissioning and step-by-step BS commissioning. During
the automatic BS commissioning, the M2000 automatically commissions BSs through
automatically creating topologies, upgrading the software, activating the configuration, and then
performing the health check.

Task Description
l

Automatic BS Commissioning
Automatic BS commissioning indicates that the BS commissioning is implemented by
running the automatic commissioning task that is created through the WiMAX enhanced
configuration system. After an automatic commissioning task is created, the M2000
automatically creates the NE topology and commissioning tasks according to the
configuration data in the WiMAX enhanced configuration system. After detecting a BS,
the M2000 starts the commissioning tasks such as software upgrade, configuration
activation, and health check automatically.

Step-by-Step BS Commissioning
In step-by-step BS commissioning mode, you can perform commissioning tasks including
configuration script creation, automatic BS detection, BS software upgrade, configuration
activation, and health check as scheduled.

4.3.1 Commissioning the BS Automatically


The M2000 automatically commissions BSs through automatically creating topologies,
upgrading the software, activating the configuration, and performing the health check.
4.3.2 Step-by-Step Commissioning
4-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

After the BS data is configured through the WCS, you can generate the configuration script and
start the following tasks: automatic BS detection, BS software upgrade, configuration file
activation, and health check.

4.3.1 Commissioning the BS Automatically


The M2000 automatically commissions BSs through automatically creating topologies,
upgrading the software, activating the configuration, and performing the health check.

Automatically Creating Commissioning Tasks


After configuring WiMAX BTS data on the WCS, you can use the deployment function provided
by the WCS to enable the M2000 to automatically create WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks.

Prerequisite
You have made the preparations for commissioning WiMAX BTSs.

Context
Only the WiMAX BTS of V300R003C00 and later releases support automatic creation of
commissioning tasks.
When using this function to create tasks for commissioning WiMAX BTSs, you do not need to
select commissioning items, because all commissioning items are selected by the M2000 by
default.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WiMAX Enhanced Configuration to open the WiMAX Enhanced
Configuration window.
Step 2 Click Deployment > NE Deployment on the toolbar to open the NE Deployment dialog box.
Figure 4-7 NE Deployment dialog box

Step 3 Select one or multiple WiMAX BTSs to be commissioned from the navigation tree in the left
pane of the NE Deployment dialog box.
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-17

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Step 4 Click Check to check that the configuration data of the WiMAX BTSs is valid.
Verifying data mainly involves checking whether the configuration data of the BTSs is valid.
This ensures that commands in the scripts can be issued to and executed on BTSs successfully.
l If Consistency is displayed as Yes, it indicates that the corresponding data verification is
successful.
l If Consistency is displayed as No, it indicates that the corresponding data verification fails.
In such a case, the cause of the failure is displayed in Error Message. You need to reconfigure
the corresponding data as prompted.
Figure 4-8 Checking configuration data

Step 5 Click Generate Commissioning File. The M2000 generates the files for creating BTS
commissioning tasks and saves the files on the server.
Step 6 Click Deploy. The M2000 automatically creates all the selected WiMAX BTSs in the topology
view and creates tasks for commissioning them.
When deploying WiMAX BTSs, you can view the progress in the task list at the lower part of
the window. If the deployment fails, you can view the cause of the failure in Information and
make relevant changes.
After the deployment is successful, you can view the newly created commissioning tasks on the
Projects tab in the Commissioning window. The task names are in the format of Name of the
deployed WiMAX BTS_wcs.
l After BTSs are powered on, the M2000 automatically detects the BTSs.
l After the WiMAX BTSs are detected, the M2000 starts the commissioning tasks. The
commissioning items are as follows:
Software upgrade: The M2000 automatically checks whether the WiMAX BTSs are of
the target version. If any WiMAX BTS is not of the target version, the M2000
automatically downloads the software of the target version from the server to the WiMAX
BTS and then activates the software.
Configuration activation: The M2000 downloads the configuration scripts to the WiMAX
BTSs and then activates the scripts.
Health check: The M2000 performs a health check on the WiMAX BTSs.
----End
4-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Viewing Commissioning Progress


You can view the progress of WiMAX BTS commissioning.

Prerequisite
WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks have been created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Commissioning to open the Commissioning window.
In this window, you can view the status and progress of a commissioning project and those of
a commissioning task in the project.
Figure 4-9 Commissioning window

Step 2 View the status of a commissioning project.


l All commissioning projects on the M2000 are displayed on the Projects tab. A
commissioning project can be in Waiting, Running, or Finished state.
l All WiMAX BTSs for which commissioning tasks have been created are displayed on the
NE List tab.
Step 3 View the progress of a commissioning task.
l Select a commissioning project on the Projects tab or a WiMAX BTS on the NE List tab.
The information about the commissioning project or the commissioning task of the WiMAX
is displayed, which include Project Type, NE Name, Current Status, and Percent.
l View the details of the WiMAX BTS commissioning task on the NE Check Information
tab.
Step 4 Optional: Click Refresh to refresh the information in the Commissioning window in real time.
----End

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-19

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Obtaining the Commissioning Report


After a WiMAX BTS commissioning task is executed, the M2000 generates a commissioning
report. You can view the report to learn about the commissioning information.

Prerequisite
WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks have been executed.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Commissioning to open the Commissioning window.
Step 2 Select the project to which the BTS commissioning task belongs under the Finished in
Projects and clickGetting Report.
The browser automatically opens and displays the contents of the commissioning report. The
check items of the commissioning report consist of the configuration status, cells, IPRAN status,
and environment. You can learn about the entire commissioning process by analyzing the
commissioning report.
NOTE

The NE commissioning report is complete only when 100% is displayed in the Percent area of a
commissioning task.

Figure 4-10 Commissioning window

Step 3 Optional: You can save the commissioning report to the specified directory through the Save
as function of the browser.
----End

4.3.2 Step-by-Step Commissioning


After the BS data is configured through the WCS, you can generate the configuration script and
start the following tasks: automatic BS detection, BS software upgrade, configuration file
activation, and health check.
4-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Generating Configuration Scripts


After configuring the BTS data on the WCS, you can generate the configuration scripts as the
configuration files for commissioning BTSs.

Context
When creating commissioning tasks manually, you need to perform this operation. If the M2000
creates commissioning tasks automatically, this operation can be omitted. The M2000 sends the
configuration scripts automatically during BTS commissioning.
To generate configuration scripts for BTSs on the WCS, you need to ensure that the M2000
server and client are ready. The connection between the M2000 and BTSs is not required.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WiMAX Enhanced Configuration on the M2000 client to open the
WiMAX Enhanced Configuration main window.
Step 2 Click Deployment > Generate File on the toolbar to open the Generate File dialog box.
Figure 4-11 Generate File dialog box

Step 3 Select one or multiple BTSs from the navigation tree in the left pane, and then click Check. The
data verification results are displayed in the right pane.
Verifying data mainly involves checking whether the configuration data of the BTSs is valid.
This ensures that commands in the scripts can be issued to and executed on BTSs successfully.
l If Consistency is displayed as Yes, it indicates that the corresponding data verification is
successful.
l If Consistency is displayed as No, it indicates that the corresponding data verification fails.
In such a case, the cause of the failure is displayed in Error Message. You need to reconfigure
the corresponding data as prompted.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-21

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Figure 4-12 Verifying data

Step 4 Perform the following operations based on the actual needs.


If...

Then...

You do not need to undo the configuration Perform Step 5.


data
You need to undo the configuration data

1. Unselect the configuration data to be


canceled.
2. Click Undo.
3. Click Yes in the displayed dialog box to
undo the configuration data that is not
selected.
4. Repeat Step 3.

Step 5 Perform the following operations according to the save path of configuration scripts.
If you need to...

Then...

Generate the configuration scripts on the Click Generate Commissioning File. The
M2000 server
M2000 saves the configuration scripts of the
BTSs automatically on the M2000 server.
Generate the configuration scripts on the Click Generate Local File to save the selected
M2000 client
data as MML files on the local PC.
The M2000 creates a folder named Planned or
Current in the specified directory and saves the
scripts to the folder.
----End

4-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Detecting BSs Automatically


After you import the DHCP parameters using the DHCP configuration management tool, the
M2000 detects a BS automatically and sets up the OM channel between the M2000 and the BS.

Prerequisite
l

The BS is installed with the hardware and powered on.

The BS is properly connected to the M2000.

Task Description
This task enables you to plan the data for the BSs to be detected and fill the data in the DHCP
Parameter Template template. Then, you need to import the data to the DHCP server using the
DHCP configuration management tool. The M2000 server can automatically detect the BSs.
NOTE

l Do not fill SecuGW IP in the DHCP Parameter Template template.


l If you fill the correct ESN when creating a network element (NE), the OM channel between the BS
and the M2000 is automatically set up after the BS is powered on.
l If you fail to obtain the ESN of an NE, you can create an NE in the topology even if the ESN is
unavailable. After obtaining the ESN of the NE, you can fill the ESN.

Data Preparation
Prepare the DHCP parameters according to 3.2 Preparing DHCP Parameters and fill in the
DHCP Parameter Template template.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the DHCP Relay.
If the BS and the M2000 server belong to different subnets or different VLANs, you must
configure the DHCP Relay on the layer 3 equipment (router or layer 3 switch) that is connected
to the BS.
The configuration method varies according to the switch. The following part takes Huawei
Quidway 3500 as an example. Assume that the M2000 is connected to VLAN 12 (gateway IP
address: 192.168.10.1), and the BS is connected to VLAN 13 (gateway IP address:
192.168.14.1).
1.

Log in to the interface of the switch through the serial port or in Telnet mode.

2.

Configure the DHCP Relay in the interface of the switch.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Step

Command

Remarks

[Quidway]interface Vlan-interface13

This command is used to


display the interface of VLAN
13.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-23

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Step

Command

Remarks

[Quidway-Vlan-interface13]ip address
192.168.14.1 255.255.255.0

This command is used to


configure the gateway IP
address of the switch connected
to the BS. In the case of a layer
3 VLAN, the IP address is
already configured.

[Quidway-Vlan-interface13]ip relay
address 192.168.10.105

This command is used to


configure the IP address chosen
by the DHCP Relay. Only the
DHCP broadcasting packets
transmitted to this IP address
can be broadcast in the switch.
Configure this IP address using
the IP address of the M2000.

[Quidway-Vlan-interface13] dhcp select


relay

This command is used to select


relays.

Step 2 On the iManager M2000 Mobile Element Management System, choose Configuration > DHCP
Configuration Management. The DHCP Configuration Management interface is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13 DHCP configuration management interface

Step 3 In the DHCP Configuration Management interface, click


(Import), select the DHCP
parameter template, and then import the DHCP parameters to the DHCP server.
4-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Then, you can view the imported data on the Wimax tab page. The data is recorded according
to NE names. Double-click the record of any NE, and then modify the DHCP parameters in the
Modify BWA32 window, as shown in Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-14 Modifying DHCP parameters

NOTE

If importing the data fails, the system displays "The format of the imported file is
invalid", as shown in Figure 4-15.
1. Click OK. Then, the error data is marked in red in the File Browser window.
2. Double-click the area marked in red to correct the data.
3. Click Import to import the data.

Figure 4-15 Error data marked in red

Step 4 On the main interface of the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology to view the
Main Topology tab page.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-25

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

If...

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Then...

The automatically detected NEs are displayed on the Main Topology Go to step Step 6.
tab page,
The NEs in the DHCP parameter template are not displayed on the
Main Topology tab page,

Go to step Step 5.

Step 5 Optional: On the Main Topology tab page, select the ASN-GW to be connected to the NE, rightclick the ASN-GW, and then select Search BTS from the shortcut menu. Then, click OK in the
displayed dialog box.
All the NEs imported by the DHCP tool are displayed on the Main Topology tab page. With
this step, creating NEs is complete, and the OM channel is set up.
Step 6 View the NE connection on the Main Topology tab page.
is not displayed on the upper left of an NE icon, you can infer that the NE is connected
l If
to the M2000. All the NEs are connected to the M2000 server, except WiMAX BTS4, as
shown in Figure 4-16.
l If an NE fails to be connected to the M2000 server, check whether the DHCP parameters are
correctly configured.
Figure 4-16 Checking the NE connection

Step 7 Run the ACT DHCPCFG command to activate and save the configuration of the OM channel.
----End

4-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Manually Creating WiMAX BTS Commissioning Tasks


After configuring BTS data on the WCS, you can create commissioning tasks manually to
commission BTSs step by step. You can set the tasks to start immediately after they are created
or start them manually.

Prerequisite
l

The preparations for BTS commissioning are complete.

The configuration scripts for the BTSs to be commissioned are ready.

The BTSs to be commissioned are created in the M2000 topology view and connected to
the M2000 server properly. For details about how to create BTSs in the M2000 topology
view, see Automatically Detecting a WiMAX BTS.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Commissioning to open the Commissioning window.
Step 2 Click New to open the task creation wizard.
Figure 4-17 Wizard for creating commissioning tasks

Step 3 Set the parameters of the commissioning project.


1.

Set Project Name.

2.

Select the type of the commissioning project.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-27

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

The project type refers to the type of the BTSs to be commissioned in the commissioning
project. In this case, you need to select WiMAX BTS.
3.

Select one or multiple WiMAX BTSs to be commissioned.


l The WiMAX BTSs for which you have created commissioning tasks are not displayed
in the NE navigation tree of the current dialog box.
l You can select ASNGW or Version to re-organize the NE navigation tree, which
facilitates the search for BTSs.
l You can type the name of a WiMAX BTS in Search to quickly find a WiMAX BTS.

4.

Click Next to set commissioning items.


For the window for setting commissioning items, see Figure 4-18. For details, see Table
4-1.

Figure 4-18 Window for setting commissioning items

Table 4-1 Commissioning items

4-28

Commissi
oning Item

Description

Operation

All

Select all the following operation


items.

Select this commissioning item.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Commissi
oning Item

Description

Operation

Download
BootROM

Download the BootROM from the


server to the corresponding
WiMAX BTSs.

Activate
BootROM

Download the BootROM software


from the standby file partitions of
the WiMAX BTSs to each board
and upgrade the BootROM of each
board.

a. Select this commissioning item.


b. Select the BootROM version to
be downloaded/activated from
the Parameter Setting dropdown list in the
BootROMVersion area box.

Download
Software

Download software from the server


to the corresponding WiMAX
BTSs.

Activate
Software

Download software from the


standby file partitions of the
WiMAX BTSs to each board and
make the software take effect.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

a. Select this commissioning item.


b. Select the software version to
be downloaded/activated from
the Parameter Setting dropdown list in the
SoftwareVersion area box.

4-29

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Commissi
oning Item

Description

Operation

Download
Configurat
ion File

Download the configuration files


from the server to the
corresponding WiMAX BTSs.
You can click Uploading New
Configuration File to upload the

a. Select this commissioning item.


b. Click Uploading New
Configuration File to upload
the configuration files of the
BTSs.
l If you intend to upload the
configuration files of
WiMAX BTSs from the
client, you need to save the
files to the folders named
after the corresponding
WiMAX BTSs.
In this case, you need to
specify the paths to the
corresponding folders.
Then, the system
automatically uploads the
configuration files to the
folders. For example, the
configuration files of
BTS_001 is stored in C:
\configuration_file
\BTS_001. To upload the
configuration files of
BTS_001, you need to
specify C:
\configuration_file as the
path. Then, the system
uploads the configuration
files in the BTS_001 folder
to the M2000 server in
batches.
l If you intend to upload the
configuration files of
WiMAX BTSs from the
server, the M2000 checks
whether the configuration
files of the BTSs exist on the
server. If the files exist on
the server, the M2000
uploads the files
automatically. Otherwise,
the M2000 displays an error
message.

4-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Commissi
oning Item

Description

Operation
NOTE
When performing
Generating Configuration
Scripts or Automatically
Creating Commissioning
Tasks, you can click
Generate Commissioning
File to generate the
configuration files of WiMAX
BTSs on the M2000 server.

configuration files from the local


PC to the M2000 server.

Download
License File

This commissioning item is


applicable to the BTS3701B only.
Download the commissioning
license to the corresponding
WiMAX BTSs. This
commissioning item is applicable
to the scenario where you
commission WiMAX BTSs by
using a temporary license instead
of a commercial license.

a. Select this commissioning item.


b. Click Upload License File to
upload the license of the
BTS3701B.

You can click Upload License


File to upload the commissioning
license from the local PC to the
M2000 server.
Health
Check

Check the running status of the


entire network.

Select this commissioning item.

Step 4 Click Finish.


You can set the tasks to start immediately after the tasks are created or them manually. For details
about how to start commissioning tasks, see 9.4.2 Starting/Stopping Commissioning Tasks.
----End

Viewing Commissioning Progress


You can view the progress of WiMAX BTS commissioning.

Prerequisite
WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks have been created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Commissioning to open the Commissioning window.
In this window, you can view the status and progress of a commissioning project and those of
a commissioning task in the project.
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-31

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figure 4-19 Commissioning window

Step 2 View the status of a commissioning project.


l All commissioning projects on the M2000 are displayed on the Projects tab. A
commissioning project can be in Waiting, Running, or Finished state.
l All WiMAX BTSs for which commissioning tasks have been created are displayed on the
NE List tab.
Step 3 View the progress of a commissioning task.
l Select a commissioning project on the Projects tab or a WiMAX BTS on the NE List tab.
The information about the commissioning project or the commissioning task of the WiMAX
is displayed, which include Project Type, NE Name, Current Status, and Percent.
l View the details of the WiMAX BTS commissioning task on the NE Check Information
tab.
Step 4 Optional: Click Refresh to refresh the information in the Commissioning window in real time.
----End

Obtaining the Commissioning Report


After a WiMAX BTS commissioning task is executed, the M2000 generates a commissioning
report. You can view the report to learn about the commissioning information.

Prerequisite
WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks have been executed.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Commissioning to open the Commissioning window.
Step 2 Select the project to which the BTS commissioning task belongs under the Finished in
Projects and clickGetting Report.
The browser automatically opens and displays the contents of the commissioning report. The
check items of the commissioning report consist of the configuration status, cells, IPRAN status,
4-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

and environment. You can learn about the entire commissioning process by analyzing the
commissioning report.
NOTE

The NE commissioning report is complete only when 100% is displayed in the Percent area of a
commissioning task.

Figure 4-20 Commissioning window

Step 3 Optional: You can save the commissioning report to the specified directory through the Save
as function of the browser.
----End

4.4 Testing the VSWR of BTS Antennas


Voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) is also referred to standing wave ratio (SWR). You can
test whether the antenna system is correctly installed according to the VSWR of the system. The
M2000 provides the function of remotely testing the VSWR of BTSs in a centralized manner.
Before testing the VSWR, you can set the threshold and display mode of the test results so that
you can find exceptions in time.

Prerequisite
l

The BTS is configured and can be managed.

The BTS does not provide services or the services are isolated.

Context
An excessively large VSWR results in short transmission distance and burned power amplifier
(PA), which affects the normal operation of the communication system. The normal VSWR
range from 1 to 1.5. The M2000 provides default VSWR threshold scheme. Before testing the
VSWR, you can reconfigure the VSWR thresholds according to the default scheme.
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-33

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

CAUTION
The VSWR test disrupts the normal services of the BTSs. Therefore, you can test the VSWR in
light BTS traffic hours or after the BTS services are isolated.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > RF Performance Test > VSWR Test. The VSWR Test window is
displayed.
Step 2 Optional: Set the thresholds and colors of the VSWR for a certain type of NEs.
1.

Click Threshold Set, the VSWR Threshold Setting dialog box is displayed.

Figure 4-21 VSWR Threshold Setting

4-34

2.

Set the NE type to WiMAX BTS.

3.

In the Threshold Value Setting area, set the thresholds in descending order and set
State to used. After setting the thresholds, click Apply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

You can set a maximum of five VSWR thresholds, including the two default thresholds
provided by the M2000.
4.

In the Color Setting area, click Foreground Color and Background Color to set colors
for the VSWR within the corresponding range.

5.

Click OK.
You can also click Default to retain the default settings.

Step 3 In the VSWR Test window, select one or multiple NEs from the navigation tree in the left pane.
Step 4 Click Test. Then, in the displayed dialog box, click Yes.
Step 5 View the test results.
1.

The VSWR Test dialog box is displayed, showing the test progress. Click Detail to test
the detailed information about the test progress.

2.

When the progress reaches 100%, click Close to close the VSWR Test dialog box. Then,
the test results are displayed on the Test Result tab page.

Step 6 Optional: Save the test results to the local computer.


1.

Click Save.

2.

Set the File Type to *.xls or *.csv.

3.

Set the save path and the filename.

Step 7 Optional: Click Print to print the test results.


----End

Follow-up Procedure
1.

Verify that the antenna system is correctly installed according to the test results.

2.

Ensure that the BTS services are resumed.

4.5 Configuring the BS Information on the ASN-GW


This section describes how to connect the ASN-GW to the downlink of the BS by configuring
BS information on the ASN-GW.

Data Preparation
Parameter

Description

bts-ip

It indicates the signaling IP address of the BS.

bts-info

It indicates the information about the BS to be added. A character string


containing a space is not supported.

bsid

It indicates the BSID of a carrier.


On the M2000 client, run the DSP BSID command to query the BSID
corresponding to the sector ID and carrier ID.

gwid

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

It indicates the ID of the ASN-GW connected to the BS.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-35

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the LMT client of the WASN9770.
NOTE

l For details about how to install and use the LMT, see the documents of the WASN9770.
l For details about the commands and operations related to the configuration of local BS information,
see the documents of the WASN9770.

Step 2 Run the system-view command to enter the system interface.


Step 3 Run the access-view command to enter the access interface.
Step 4 Run the bts command to add the BS information on the WASN9770.
NOTE

l To enable R6 link detection, set control-flag to enable.


l To enable the BS to support the wholesale function, set wholesale-flag to enable.

Step 5 Run the local-bs command to bind the BSID of the carrier on the WASN9770.
Step 6 Run the display bts and display local-bs commands to query the configuration result.
----End

Example
For example, bts-ip = 172.16.11.19, bts-info = WiMAX, control-plane link detection switch =
ON, user-plane link detection switch = OFF, BS wholesale mode = OFF, bsid =
0000-6400-0A00, and gwid = 0101-0101-0101.
<WASN9770> system-view
[WASN9770] access-view
[WASN9770-access] bts bts-ip 172.16.11.19 bts-info WiMAX control-flag enable userflag disable wholesale-flag disable
[WASN9770-access] local-bs bsid 0000-6400-0A00 bts-ip 172.16.11.19 gwid
0101-0101-0101

4.6 Configuring the RET Antenna (Optional)


After the Remote Electrical Tilt (RET) antenna is installed, it must be configured correctly so
that it can work normally.

Task Description
This task enables you to configure a RET antenna by adding a RET antenna and adjusting the
antenna angle.

Procedure
Step 1 Add a RET antenna.
1.

Run the SET ALDPOWERSW command to turn on the power switch of the RRU control
port so that power supply and control signals are provided for the Remote Control Unit
(RCU).
CONTROLPORT indicates the control port of the RRU, including the following ports:

4-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

l RS485 port (RS485)


When the RS485 port of the RRU (the silkscreen is RET and the port type is DB9)
provides power supply and control signals for the RCU, the RS485 port must be selected
as the control port of the RRU.
l Antenna port A (R0A) and antenna port C (R0C)
Install the Smart Bias-Tee (SBT) on the RET antenna. The SBT obtains DC power from
the feeder connected to the port A on the antenna or port C on the antenna and provides
power for the RCU. In addition, the SBT converts the OOK signals from the feeder to
RS485 signals and sends the signals to the RCU.

CAUTION
On one RRU, you can turn on the power switch of only one port (RS485, R0A, or R0C).
The RRU3702 supports R0A or R0C, and the RRU3703 supports only R0A.
2.

Run the DSP ALDWORKSTATE command to query the power switch status.
You can query the power switch status and the current of the RRU control port. If
ALDPOWERSWITCH is set to ON, it indicates that the power switch is turned on.

3.

To query the type and sequence number of the RET antenna, run the SCN ALD command.
Record the values of DEVICETYPE and UNIQUEID, which are to be used in Step 1.4.

4.

Run the ADD ALD command to add a RET antenna.


The UNIQUEID value of the DEVICETYPE parameter must be the same as the query
result of Step 1.3.

5.

Run the SCN ALD command to scan the RET antenna connected to the RRU and establish
the OM link.
NOTE

If scanning is not performed, subsequent commands cannot be executed.

6.

Run the SET RETCALI command to calibrate the RET antenna.


NOTE

If you do not perform the calibration, the RET function may be unavailable.

Step 2 Adjust the tilt angle of the RET antenna.


NOTE

In the following commands, the tilt angle is 0.1 degree.

1.

Run the DSP ALDDEVICEDATA command to query the range of adjusting the tile angle
of the RET antenna.

2.

Run the SET RETOBLIQUITY command to change the current angle of the RET antenna.

3.

Run the DSP RETOBLIQUITY command to query the current tilt angle of the RET
antenna.

----End

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-37

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4.7 Configuring Auxiliary Equipment (Optional)


A BS can be configured with the OMB, APM30H, EMU, and EMUA based on application
scenarios. In this case, run related commands to add the equipment and configure alarm
parameters.
4.7.1 Adding an OMB
When the outdoor mini box (OMB) is used, you need to run commands to add an OMB cabinet
to ensure that the OMB is manageable.
4.7.2 Configuring the APM
The advanced power module (APM) provides power distribution, power backup, and
environment monitoring functions. When the auxiliary product APM30H is used, the DIP switch
of the power monitoring unit (PMU) needs to be set correctly before the APM30H cabinet, power
module, and power monitoring module are installed.
4.7.3 Configuring the IBBS
The Integrated Backup Battery System (IBBS) supplies power to the BS through built-in storage
batteries. After the IBBS and storage batteries are installed, you need to configure them.
4.7.4 Configuring the EMU/EMUA
The environment monitoring unit (EMU) provides environment monitoring for a BS. When the
auxiliary product EMU is configured, the DIP switch of the EMU need to be set correctly before
the EMU is added.
4.7.5 Configuring Customized Alarms
Customized alarms need to be configured according to the sensor types to monitor the
environment of the equipment after sensors are installed.
4.7.6 Verifying Customized Alarms
After sensors are installed and related alarms settings are complete, you can verify the system
by setting some trigger conditions for man-made alarms. If the man-made alarms can be reported
normally, you can infer that the configurations are correct.

4.7.1 Adding an OMB


When the outdoor mini box (OMB) is used, you need to run commands to add an OMB cabinet
to ensure that the OMB is manageable.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the ADD CABINET command to add an OMB cabinet.
For example, to add an OMB cabinet (cabinet No.: 2, cabinet type: OMB, cabinet name: OMB
cabinet), run the following command:
ADD CABINET: CN=2, TYPE=OMB, DESC=Outdoor Mini Box;
NOTE

Run the LST CABINET command to check whether the OMB cabinet is successfully configured.

----End

4-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

4.7.2 Configuring the APM


The advanced power module (APM) provides power distribution, power backup, and
environment monitoring functions. When the auxiliary product APM30H is used, the DIP switch
of the power monitoring unit (PMU) needs to be set correctly before the APM30H cabinet, power
module, and power monitoring module are installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Set bits 4, 3, 2, and 1 of the DIP switch for the PMU to 0, 0, 1, and 1 respectively.
NOTE

l The ON state of the PMU DIP switch indicates 1, and the OFF state indicates 0.
l The PMU is a power monitoring unit. For details on the position of the PMU in the APM30H cabinet,
position of the DIP switch, and setting of the DIP switch, see the APM30H User Guide .

Step 2 Run the MOD CABINET command to add an APM30H cabinet.


For example:
MOD CABINET: CN=0, TYPE=APM30;

Step 3 Run the ADD PMU command to add the PMU.


For example, the cabinet No. is 0, the APM30 provides the power, and other parameters use
default settings. To add a PMU, run the following command:
ADD PMU: CN=0, PTYPE=APM30;

Step 4 Run the ADD PSU command to add the PSU.

CAUTION
You need to configure the PSU based on the number of PSUs to be installed and the installation
slots.
ADD PSU: CN=0, SN=1;
ADD PSU: CN=0, SN=2;
ADD PSU: CN=0, SN=3;

Step 5 Run the following commands to check whether the APM is successfully added:
l LST CABINET
l LST PMU
l LST PSU
----End

4.7.3 Configuring the IBBS


The Integrated Backup Battery System (IBBS) supplies power to the BS through built-in storage
batteries. After the IBBS and storage batteries are installed, you need to configure them.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the APM.
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-39

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

NOTE

The IBBS communicates with the BBU through the PMU in the APM. Therefore, you need to configure
the APM first. For details, see 4.7.2 Configuring the APM .

Step 2 Run the ADD CABINET command to add an IBBS cabinet.


For example, to add an IBBS cabinet, run the following command:
ADD CABINET: CN=1, TYPE=BBC;

Step 3 Run the ADD BATTERY command to add storage batteries and configure storage battery
parameters.

CAUTION
When setting the parameters, you need to ensure that the configured capacity of the batteries is
same as the actual capacity of the installed batteries. Otherwise, the batteries may be damaged.
For details on storage battery parameters, see the description of the ADD BATTERY command.
For example, the No. of the cabinet where the PMU is installed is 0, the batteries are installed
in the IBBS cabinet and the capacity is 184 Ah, the low voltage disconnection function is enabled,
and other parameters use default settings. To add batteries, run the following command:
ADD BATTERY: CN=1, INSTALLTYPE=OUTER, BC=184, HTSDF=ENABLE, LVSDF=ENABLE;

Step 4 Run the following commands to check whether the IBBS is successfully configured:
l LST CABINET
l LST BATTERY
----End

4.7.4 Configuring the EMU/EMUA


The environment monitoring unit (EMU) provides environment monitoring for a BS. When the
auxiliary product EMU is configured, the DIP switch of the EMU need to be set correctly before
the EMU is added.

Context
The EMU is classified into two types: EMU for outdoor equipment and EMUA for indoor
equipment.

Procedure
Step 1 Set bits 4, 3, 2, and 1 of the SW_ADDR switch of the EMU/EMUA to 0, 1, 0, and 0 respectively.
NOTE

l The ON state of a bit indicates 0, and the OFF state of a bit indicates 1.
l For details on positions and setting methods of the DIP switch, see the EMUA User Guide and the
EMU User Guide.

Step 2 Run the ADD EMU command to add an EMU or EMUA.


For example, to add an EMU by using default parameters, run the following command:
ADD EMU:;

4-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Step 3 Run the LST EMU command to check whether the EMU is successfully added and whether the
parameters are correctly configured.
----End

4.7.5 Configuring Customized Alarms


Customized alarms need to be configured according to the sensor types to monitor the
environment of the equipment after sensors are installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the SET ALMPORT command to set the input port of the environment signals.
NOTE

Descriptions of important parameters:


l SW: Status of the port switch. When the switch is set to ON, alarms can be detected and reported.
l AID: It indicates the alarm ID bound to the alarm port. When the alarm port detects an alarm, it reports
the alarm.
l PT: It indicates the port type. BOOL indicates a digital port and VALUE indicates an analog port.
l AVOL: Alarm level. It indicates whether the sensor on a port is low-level alarm or high-level alarm.
A digital sensor must be used here. It is valid when PT is set to BOOL.
l Upper and lower thresholds: It is valid when PT is set to VALUE. It is configured based on sensor
parameters.

For example, to set the input port of the environment signals, run the following command:
SET ALMPORT: CN=1, SRN=0, SN=0, PN=0, SW=ON, AID=65033, PT=BOOL, AVOL=HIGH;

Step 2 Run the SET ENVALMPARA command to set the name of the environment alarm, level, and
type of the network management system.
NOTE

Descriptions of important parameters:


l ALVL: Alarm severity. It indicates how much the fault affects the services. The alarm levels are
categorized into the following types: critical (critical alarm), major (major alarm), minor (minor alarm),
and warning (warning alarm).
l ASS: It indicates the type of the network management.

For example, to set the environment alarm parameters (alarm ID: 65055, alarm name: alm00101,
alarm severity: major alarm, type of the network management: environment system), run the
following command:
SET ENVALMPARA: ALMID=65033, ANM="alm00101", ALVL=Major, ASS=ENV;

Step 3 Remarks on the clearance of smoke and door status alarms.


The alarm level of smoke or door status alarms is the highest. When the smoke or door status
alarms are generated, you need to clear the alarms manually because they cannot be cleared
automatically. The manually cleared alarms are not cleared actually. You need to check and
clear the alarms at the site.
l To clear the smoke alarms of the PMU, run the following command:
CLR PMUALM: CN=1;

l To clear the smoke and door status alarms of the EMU, run the following command:
CLR EMUALM:;

----End
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-41

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4.7.6 Verifying Customized Alarms


After sensors are installed and related alarms settings are complete, you can verify the system
by setting some trigger conditions for man-made alarms. If the man-made alarms can be reported
normally, you can infer that the configurations are correct.

Procedure
Step 1 Set some trigger conditions for man-made external alarms.
Step 2 Check the alarms on the M2000 client.
If the alarms can be normally reported, you can infer that the associated configurations take
effect. Otherwise, you need to reconfigure the environment monitoring equipment.
----End

Example
If a water sensor is configured for a BS, the ID of the water damage alarm is 65033.
1.

Place the water sensor into water.

2.

Log in to the M2000 client to query whether the alarm 65033 is reported. If the alarm is
generated, you can infer that the configuration succeeds. Otherwise, check the installation
and configuration again.

4.8 Clearing Alarms


After the OM channel between the M2000 and the BS is set up, you need to check and clear
alarms to ensure successful commissioning. After the commissioning is performed, you need to
check and clear alarms to ensure the normal operation of the BS.

Task Description
This task enables you to check the current alarms to rectify the faults according to the suggestions
provided by the system before and after the commissioning.
NOTE

The M2000 provides the engineering state alarm feature. When the BS is managed by the M2000 for the
first time, the engineering state of the BS is TESTING by default.
1. After the commissioning is implemented, check and clear the alarms in the TESTING state.
2. Set the engineering state to NORMAL.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the alarms in the TESTING state. For details, see Activating the Engineering State Alarm
Feature.
Step 2 Clear current alarms according to the alarm handling suggestions or alarm help.
Step 3 After the alarms are cleared, record the process for handling the alarms and optimize the alarm
handling suggestions provided in detailed alarm information.
4-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

4 GUI-Based Remote Commissioning

Step 4 Set the engineering state of the BS to NORMAL. For details, see Deactivating the Engineering
State Alarm Feature.
You can query the alarms in the NORMAL state in the following four methods:
l On the M2000 client, choose Monitor > > Browse Alarm List. In the Filter dialog box,
set inquiry conditions as required. For details, see the M2000 Online Help.
TIP

After the Filter dialog box is displayed, you can press F1 to view help information.

l Select the network element (NE) on the Main Topology tab page of the M2000, and then
right-click Query Alarm/Event to query alarm information.
l On the Web LMT, choose Alarm, and then view the current alarms in the Alarm dialog box.
Double-click any alarm to view the alarm handling suggestions.
l Run the LST ALMAF command to query all active alarms.
----End

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-43

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

MML-Based Remote Commissioning

About This Chapter


MML-based remote commissioning is a process of commissioning a BS through MML
commands.
1.

5.1 Detecting BSs Automatically


After you import the DHCP parameters using the DHCP configuration management tool,
the M2000 detects a BS automatically and sets up the OM channel between the M2000 and
the BS.

2.

5.2 Clearing Alarms


After the OM channel between the M2000 and the BS is set up, you need to check and clear
alarms to ensure successful commissioning. After the commissioning is performed, you
need to check and clear alarms to ensure the normal operation of the BS.

3.

5.3 Upgrading Software Version (Optional)


Query the BS software version. If the current BS software version is inconsistent with the
target version, you need to upgrade the BS software.

4.

5.4 Configuring the BS Data


This section describes how to run the MML commands to configure the BS data.

5.

5.6 Optional Commissioning Tasks


The RET antenna and auxiliary equipment (OMB, EMU, EMUA, and APM30H) are
optional. When the preceding equipment is required, you need to configure them after they
are installed.

6.

5.7 Configuring the BS Information on the ASN-GW


This section describes how to connect the ASN-GW to the downlink of the BS by
configuring BS information on the ASN-GW.

7.

5.8 Checking the Running Status of the BTS


This describes how to perform a health check and clear alarms.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

5.1 Detecting BSs Automatically


After you import the DHCP parameters using the DHCP configuration management tool, the
M2000 detects a BS automatically and sets up the OM channel between the M2000 and the BS.

Prerequisite
l

The BS is installed with the hardware and powered on.

The BS is properly connected to the M2000.

Task Description
This task enables you to plan the data for the BSs to be detected and fill the data in the DHCP
Parameter Template template. Then, you need to import the data to the DHCP server using the
DHCP configuration management tool. The M2000 server can automatically detect the BSs.
NOTE

l Do not fill SecuGW IP in the DHCP Parameter Template template.


l If you fill the correct ESN when creating a network element (NE), the OM channel between the BS
and the M2000 is automatically set up after the BS is powered on.
l If you fail to obtain the ESN of an NE, you can create an NE in the topology even if the ESN is
unavailable. After obtaining the ESN of the NE, you can fill the ESN.

Data Preparation
Prepare the DHCP parameters according to 3.2 Preparing DHCP Parameters and fill in the
DHCP Parameter Template template.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the DHCP Relay.
If the BS and the M2000 server belong to different subnets or different VLANs, you must
configure the DHCP Relay on the layer 3 equipment (router or layer 3 switch) that is connected
to the BS.
The configuration method varies according to the switch. The following part takes Huawei
Quidway 3500 as an example. Assume that the M2000 is connected to VLAN 12 (gateway IP
address: 192.168.10.1), and the BS is connected to VLAN 13 (gateway IP address:
192.168.14.1).

5-2

1.

Log in to the interface of the switch through the serial port or in Telnet mode.

2.

Configure the DHCP Relay in the interface of the switch.


Step

Command

Remarks

[Quidway]interface Vlan-interface13

This command is used to


display the interface of VLAN
13.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Step

Command

Remarks

[Quidway-Vlan-interface13]ip address
192.168.14.1 255.255.255.0

This command is used to


configure the gateway IP
address of the switch connected
to the BS. In the case of a layer
3 VLAN, the IP address is
already configured.

[Quidway-Vlan-interface13]ip relay
address 192.168.10.105

This command is used to


configure the IP address chosen
by the DHCP Relay. Only the
DHCP broadcasting packets
transmitted to this IP address
can be broadcast in the switch.
Configure this IP address using
the IP address of the M2000.

[Quidway-Vlan-interface13] dhcp select


relay

This command is used to select


relays.

Step 2 On the iManager M2000 Mobile Element Management System, choose Configuration > DHCP
Configuration Management. The DHCP Configuration Management interface is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1 DHCP configuration management interface

Step 3 In the DHCP Configuration Management interface, click


(Import), select the DHCP
parameter template, and then import the DHCP parameters to the DHCP server.
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Then, you can view the imported data on the Wimax tab page. The data is recorded according
to NE names. Double-click the record of any NE, and then modify the DHCP parameters in the
Modify BWA32 window, as shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 Modifying DHCP parameters

NOTE

If importing the data fails, the system displays "The format of the imported file is
invalid", as shown in Figure 5-3.
1. Click OK. Then, the error data is marked in red in the File Browser window.
2. Double-click the area marked in red to correct the data.
3. Click Import to import the data.

Figure 5-3 Error data marked in red

Step 4 On the main interface of the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology to view the
Main Topology tab page.

5-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

If...

Then...

The automatically detected NEs are displayed on the Main Topology Go to step Step 6.
tab page,
The NEs in the DHCP parameter template are not displayed on the
Main Topology tab page,

Go to step Step 5.

Step 5 Optional: On the Main Topology tab page, select the ASN-GW to be connected to the NE, rightclick the ASN-GW, and then select Search BTS from the shortcut menu. Then, click OK in the
displayed dialog box.
All the NEs imported by the DHCP tool are displayed on the Main Topology tab page. With
this step, creating NEs is complete, and the OM channel is set up.
Step 6 View the NE connection on the Main Topology tab page.
is not displayed on the upper left of an NE icon, you can infer that the NE is connected
l If
to the M2000. All the NEs are connected to the M2000 server, except WiMAX BTS4, as
shown in Figure 5-4.
l If an NE fails to be connected to the M2000 server, check whether the DHCP parameters are
correctly configured.
Figure 5-4 Checking the NE connection

Step 7 Run the ACT DHCPCFG command to activate and save the configuration of the OM channel.
----End

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5.2 Clearing Alarms


After the OM channel between the M2000 and the BS is set up, you need to check and clear
alarms to ensure successful commissioning. After the commissioning is performed, you need to
check and clear alarms to ensure the normal operation of the BS.

Task Description
This task enables you to check the current alarms to rectify the faults according to the suggestions
provided by the system before and after the commissioning.
NOTE

The M2000 provides the engineering state alarm feature. When the BS is managed by the M2000 for the
first time, the engineering state of the BS is TESTING by default.
1. After the commissioning is implemented, check and clear the alarms in the TESTING state.
2. Set the engineering state to NORMAL.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the alarms in the TESTING state. For details, see Activating the Engineering State Alarm
Feature.
Step 2 Clear current alarms according to the alarm handling suggestions or alarm help.
Step 3 After the alarms are cleared, record the process for handling the alarms and optimize the alarm
handling suggestions provided in detailed alarm information.
Step 4 Set the engineering state of the BS to NORMAL. For details, see Deactivating the Engineering
State Alarm Feature.
You can query the alarms in the NORMAL state in the following four methods:
l On the M2000 client, choose Monitor > > Browse Alarm List. In the Filter dialog box,
set inquiry conditions as required. For details, see the M2000 Online Help.
TIP

After the Filter dialog box is displayed, you can press F1 to view help information.

l Select the network element (NE) on the Main Topology tab page of the M2000, and then
right-click Query Alarm/Event to query alarm information.
l On the Web LMT, choose Alarm, and then view the current alarms in the Alarm dialog box.
Double-click any alarm to view the alarm handling suggestions.
l Run the LST ALMAF command to query all active alarms.
----End

5.3 Upgrading Software Version (Optional)


Query the BS software version. If the current BS software version is inconsistent with the target
version, you need to upgrade the BS software.

Prerequisite
The OM channel is set up.
5-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Task Description
This task enables you to query the system software version and board versions. If the software
version and board versions are inconsistent with the target version, you need to perform an
upgrade.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the BS software version. If the current BS software version is inconsistent with the target
version, upload the software package to the M2000 server. For details, see 4.1 Uploading the
Software Package.
Step 2 Create a commissioning project using a commissioning tool and upgrade the BS software. For
details, see Creating a Commissioning Project.
NOTE

Choose the following commissioning items when you upgrade the BS software through the commissioning
project.
l Download BootROM
l Activate BootROM
l Download Software
l Activate Software
l Health Check

Step 3 Query the upgrade result. For details, see Querying the Commissioning Report.
----End

5.4 Configuring the BS Data


This section describes how to run the MML commands to configure the BS data.
1.

5.4.1 Methods of Running the MML Commands


You can run a single MML command or MML commands in batches.

2.

5.4.2 Configuring Basic Parameters


The basic parameters configured for a BS include the operator ID, site ID, gateway
information, clock reference source, and time reference source.

3.

5.4.3 Configuring Hardware Parameters


After the BS is installed, you need to configure the device data according to the installed
hardware.

4.

5.4.4 Configuring the Transmission Link


This section describes how to configure the FE/GE transmission link between the BS and
the ASN-GW to ensure normal communication on the R6 interface.

5.

5.4.5 Configuring R6 Link Detection (Optional)


The R6 link detection involves signaling-plane detection and user-plane detection. You can
locate network faults as early as possible by detecting the R6 link.

6.

5.4.6 Configure Radio Parameters


This section describes how to add sectors and carriers to a BS.

7.

5.4.7 Configuring the Information About Neighbor Cells and Triggers

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

According to the network planning, the information about neighbor cells and triggers for
each sector need to be configured so that an MS can be handed over between service areas.

5.4.1 Methods of Running the MML Commands


You can run a single MML command or MML commands in batches.

Procedure
Step 1 On the M2000 client, choose Maintenance > MML Command.
Step 2 Select the BS on which commands are executed in the navigation tree on the left of the MML
Command tab page.
Step 3 Copy the command script to the input text box, as shown in Figure 5-5. Then, press F9 to run
the commands in patches. You can also run the command entered in the command input text
box one by one.

CAUTION
The comments must be deleted before commands are executed on the M2000 client.

Figure 5-5 Command and script input text boxes

----End
5-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

5.4.2 Configuring Basic Parameters


The basic parameters configured for a BS include the operator ID, site ID, gateway information,
clock reference source, and time reference source.

Data Preparation
For details, see 3.4.1 Preparing Basic Parameters .

Default Configuration
The default BS configuration comprises the information about the clock source, time source,
time threshold, and time zone. You can modify the configuration according to the actual
conditions at the site.
You can run the following commands to configure the BS clock and time:
ADD
ADD
SET
SET
SET
SET

GPS: GN=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, CABLETYPE=COAXIAL, CABLE_LEN=0, MODE=GPS;


CLKSRC: CLKSRC=GPS, PRI=1;
CLKMODE: MODE=AUTO;
TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;
TIMETHRD: THRD=10, SWITCH=VALID;
TZ: ZONET=GMT+0800, DST=NO;

Procedure
Step 1 Run the SET RBSNAME command to set the BS name.
For example, to set the BS name to WiMAX, run the following command:
SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";

Step 2 Run the ADD BTSINFO command to add the operator ID and site ID.
For example, to set the operator ID to 100 and site ID to 10, run the following command:
ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;

Run the LST BTSINFO command to query the operator ID and site ID.
NOTE

If the operator ID and site ID are configured incorrectly, perform the following steps:
1. Run the MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG command to block all configured carriers.
2. Run the MOD OPID command to change the operator ID. Run the MOD SITEID command to change
the site ID.

Step 3 Run the MOD GWIP command to set the gateway IP address and gateway ID.
For example, to set gateway IP address to 172.16.41.10 and gateway ID to 0101-0101-0101, run
the following command:
MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";

For example, to set gateway IP address to 172.16.41.10, gateway ID to 0101-0101-0101,


secondary gateway IP address to 172.16.45.10, and secondary gateway ID to 0505-0505-0505,
run the following command:
MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101",
SECONDARYGWIP="172.16.45.10", SECONDARYGWID="0505-0505-0505";

Step 4 Configure the GPS clock reference source.


Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-9

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

1.

Run the MOD GPS command to modify the configuration of the GPS.
For example:
MOD GPS: CABLE_LEN=10;

2.

Run the SET CLKMODE command to set the working mode of the clock.
For example, to set the working mode of the clock to MANUAL and reference source to
GPS, run the following command:
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;

Step 5 Configure the reference time source.


1.

Run the SET TIMESRC command to set the type of the reference time source.
l When TIMESRC is set to GPS, the time of the GPS is configured as the reference time
source of the BS.
l When TIMESRC is set to NTP, the time of the NTP server is configured as the reference
time source of the BS. Run the ADD NTPC command to configure the NTP client.
l When TIMESRC is set to USER, the time of the BS is set manually. Run the SET
TIME command to set NE time.

2.

Run the DSP TIME command to query the current time.

Step 6 Set the time zone and Daylight Saving Time (DST).
1.

Run the SET TZ command to set the time zone and DST.

2.

Run the LST TZ command to query the time zone and DST.

----End

5.4.3 Configuring Hardware Parameters


After the BS is installed, you need to configure the device data according to the installed
hardware.

Task Description
This task enables you to configure the device data according to the installation slots of boards,
number of RRUs, and connection between the RRU and the BBBI. Otherwise, the equipment
fails to function properly.

Data Preparation
Record the slots of boards in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Installation slots of boards

5-10

Board

Default Slot

BMPT

BBBI

UPEU

19

Number of
Boards

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Actual Slot

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Board

Default Slot

UEIU

Number of
Boards

Actual Slot

The default configuration of boards is as follows:


By default, the BMPT is installed in slot 7.
By default, the BBBI is installed in slot 3.
By default, the UPEU is installed in slot 19.
By default, the FAN is installed in slot 16.

The default configurations of the RRU are as follows:


ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=1;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=2;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RCN=0, RN="RRU-00";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, RCN=1, RN="RRU-01";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, RCN=2, RN="RRU-02";
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=DISABLE;

Procedure
Step 1 Run the DSP BRD command to query the configuration of boards.
You can run the DSP BRD command to query the hardware type, configuration, and working
status of boards.
NOTE

l If the current configuration is consistent with the required configuration, you do not need to add any
board.
l If the current configuration does not meet the requirements, you need to add boards.
l Run the RMV BRD command to remove the configuration that is not required.
Before delivery, the information about the BMPT is configured in slots 6 and 7 by default. If only one
BMPT is configured, you need to remove the configuration that is not required.

Step 2 Run the ADD BRD command to configure boards in the BBU subrack.
For example, to add two BBBIs in slots 0 and 1 and add one UPEU in slot 18, run the following
commands:
ADD BRD: CN=0, SRN=0, BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=0;

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-11

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

ADD BRD: CN=0, SRN=0, BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=1;


ADD BRD: CN=0, SRN=0, BOARDTYPE=PEU, SN=18;

Step 3 Configure the connection between the RRU and the BBBI.
1.

Run the LST RRUCHAIN command to query the configured connected between the RRU
and the BBBI.

2.

According to the query result and installed hardware, add the new connection using the
ADD RRUCHAIN command, or change the connection using the MOD RRUCHAIN
command.
NOTE

For details on the RRU topology, see 1.5 RRU Topology .

For example, to add a chain topology where the optical fiber is connected to the CPRI0
port on the BBBI in slot 3, run the following command:
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HSN=3, HPN=0;

For example, to add a ring topology where two optical fibers are connected to the CPRI0
port and CPRI1 port on the BBBI in slot 3, run the following command:
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=RING, BM=COLD, HSN=3, HPN=0, TSN=3, TPN=1;

For example, to add a load balancing topology where two optical fibers are connected to
the CPRI2 port on the BBBI in slot 3 and the CPRI2 port on the BBBI in slot 0, run the
following command:
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=2, TSN=0, TPN=2;

For example, to change the RRU topology to a load balancing topology, run the following
command:
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=2, TSN=0, TPN=2;

Step 4 Configure the RRU.


1.

Run the LST RRU command to query the configuration of RRUs.


l If the current configuration is consistent with the required configuration, you do not
need to add any RRU.
l If the current configuration does not meet the requirements, you need to add RRUs.
l Run the RMV RRU command to remove the configuration that is not required.

2.

Run the ADD RRU command to add an RRU.


For example, to add an RRU (RRU ID = 0), run the following command:
ADD RRU: SRN=60, RCN=0, RN="RRU01";

Step 5 Run the MOD CPRIINFO command to configure the rate and convergence mode of the CPRI
port.
For example, to set the rate of the CPRI0 port on the BBBI in slot 3 to G245, and the convergence
mode to DISABLE, run the following command:
MOD CPRIINFO: SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=DISABLE;

For example, to set the optical port rate of the CPRI0 port on the BBBI in slot 3 to G384, and
the convergence mode to THREE, run the following command:
MOD CPRIINFO: SN=3, CPRISPEED=G384, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=THREE;

Step 6 Run the DSP BRD command to query the status of all boards and RRUs.
5-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


NOTE

If any board or RRU is not functioning properly, reset it.

Table 5-2 Board status


Board Status

Description

Normal Status

Administrative
status

l Blocked

Unblocked

l Gradually blocked
l Unblocked

Operating status

l Operable

Operable

l Inoperable
Alarm status

l No alarms

No alarms

l Warning
l Minor alarm
l Major alarm
l Critical alarm
Available

l Normal

Normal

l Faulty
l Not in position
l Not configured
l The type of the configured
board is inconsistent with that
of the inserted board.
l Powered off
l Being started
l Deteriorated

----End

5.4.4 Configuring the Transmission Link


This section describes how to configure the FE/GE transmission link between the BS and the
ASN-GW to ensure normal communication on the R6 interface.

Task Description
This task enables you to configure the attribute of the Ethernet port, DEVIP, SIGCH,
IPLGCPORT, IPPATH, and IPRT.

Data Preparation
For details, see 3.4.3 Preparing Transmission Parameters .
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-13

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Networking Example
Figure 5-6 shows the networking case corresponding to the subsequent configurations.
Figure 5-6 Network topology

NOTE

l DEVIP1 and NEXTHOP IP1 belong to the same network segment. NEXTHOP IP1 and IP A2' belong
to the same network segment.
l DEVIP2 and NEXTHOP IP2 belong to the same network segment. NEXTHOP IP2 and IP B2' belong
to the same network segment.
l When other transmission equipment is configured between the BS and the ASN-GW, it is recommended
that the transmission equipment provide sufficient buffering capabilities to prevent packet fragment
from causing bursts. If burst caused by packet fragment occurs, some burst packets will be discarded,
and the BS fails to create frames. In this case, the rate on the air interface fluctuates, and the bandwidth
usage is reduced.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the SET ETHPORT command to set the attribute of the Ethernet port.

CAUTION
The rate and duplex mode of the Ethernet port must be consistent with those of the corresponding
router or switch.
For example, to configure the parameters of the Ethernet port, run the following command:
5-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, PN=0, PA=COPPER, MTU=1500, SPEED=AUTO, DUPLEX=AUTO;

Run the LST ETHPORT command to check whether the attribute of the Ethernet port is
configured correctly.
Step 2 Run the ADD DEVIP command to add the DEVIP.
For example, to configure the DEVIP of the OM channel (IP = 172.17.11.19; mask =
255.255.255.0), run the following command:
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.17.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";

For example, to configure the DEVIP for the IP path and the signaling channel (IP =
172.16.11.19; mask = 255.255.255.0), run the following command:
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.16.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";

Run the LST DEVIP command to check whether the IP address of the interface is configured
correctly.
Step 3 Run the ADD SIGCH command to add a signaling channel.
For example, to add a signaling channel (Local Signaling IP = 172.16.11.123; Peer Signaling
IP = 172.16.41.10), run the following command:
ADD SIGCH: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", PEERIP="172.16.41.10";

Run the LST SIGCH command to check whether the signaling channel is configured correctly.
Step 4 Run the ADD IPLGCPORT command to add a logical port.
The logical port is used to control the transmission bandwidth.
For example, to add a logical port on the BMPT in slot 7 (Logical Port No. = 0; Port Type =
ETH; Port No. = 0; TX Bandwidth = 10000 kbit/s; RX Bandwidth = 10000 kbit/s), run the
following command:
ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0, TXBW=10000,
RXBW=10000, TXCBS=20000, TXEBS=20000;

Run the LST IPLGCPORT to check whether the logical port is configured correctly.
Step 5 Run the ADD IPPATH command to add an IP path.
For example, to add an IP path, the local IP address of which is the same as the DEVIP and peer
IP address of which is the same as the GWIP, (Local IP = 172.16.11.19; Peer IP = 172.16.41.10;
Path Type = QoS; DSCP = 63), run the following command:
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, LPN=0,
LOCALIP="172.16.11.19", PEERIP="172.16.41.10", PATHTYPE=QOS, DSCP=48,
PATHCHK=DISABLED;

Run the LST IPPATH command to check whether all the IP paths are configured correctly.
Step 6 Run the ADD IPRT command to add the route from the BS to the ASN-GW, and the route from
the BS to the M2000.
l For example, to add the route from the BS to the ASN-GW, run the following command:
Assume that the GWIP/DSTIP is 172.16.41.10 and the IP address of next hop is: 172.16.11.1.
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="172.16.41.10", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1";

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-15

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

l For example, to add the information about the route between the BS and the M2000, run the
following command: Assume that the IP address of the M2000 is 192.168.10.105 and the IP
address of next hop is 172.17.11.1.
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="192.168.10.105", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1";

Run the DSP IPRT command to check whether the IP routes are configured correctly.
Step 7 Run the SET DIFPRI command to set priorities for differential services. (optional
configuration)
The R6 interface transmits the UGS, rtPS, ertPS, nrtPS, and BE services. Setting priorities for
differential services means that differential services are configured with different transmission
priorities. High-priority services are transmitted first so that the QoS can be achieved.
Run the LST DIFPRI command to query the priorities for differential services.
Step 8 Run the PING command to check whether the R6 interface is enabled.
NOTE

If CONTPING is set to ENABLE, you can press Ctrl+Q to stop pinging.

For example, to check whether the R6 interface is enabled, run the following command:
PING: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SRCIP="172.16.11.19", DSTIP="172.16.41.10",
CONTPING=DISABLE;

Step 9 Run the ADD VLANMAP command to configure VLAN mapping of next hop. (Optional: when
VLAN networking is used)
For example, to configure VLAN mapping of next hop (Next Hop IP = 172.17.11.1; VLAN
Mode = VLAN group; VLAN ID = 0 ), run the following command:
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", MODE=VLANCLASS, VLANGROUPNO=0;

Step 10 Run the ADD VLANCLASS command to configure VLAN priority mapping. (Optional: Add
VLAN to VLAN group)
For example, to configure VLAN priority mapping (VLAN Group No. = 0; Traffic Type = user
data, User Data Service Priority = 48; VLAN ID = 0; VLAN Priority = 1), run the following
command:
ADD VLANCLASS: VLANGROUPNO=0, TRAFFICTYPE=USERDATA, SRVPRI=48, VLANID=0,
VLANPRI=1;

Step 11 Configure primary and secondary ASN-GWs. (Optional: when primary/secondary ASN-GW
scheme is used)
If the GWIP (172.16.41.10) and GWID (0101-0101-0101) of the primary ASN-GW are
configured, the GWIP of the secondary ASN-GW is 172.16.45.10 and the GWID of the
secondary ASN-GW is 0505-0505-0505. Example:
ADD SIGCH: LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", PEERIP="172.16.45.10", CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7;
ADD IPPATH: ID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SSN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0, LOCALIP="172.16.11.19",
PEERIP="172.16.45.10", PATHTYPE=QOS, DSCP=63;
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SSN=0, DSTIP="172.16.41.10", MASK="255.255.255.255",
RT=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1";
MOD GWIP: GWIp="172.16.41.10", GWId="0101-0101-0101",
SecondaryGWIp="172.16.45.10", SecondaryGWId="0505-0505-0505";

----End
5-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

5.4.5 Configuring R6 Link Detection (Optional)


The R6 link detection involves signaling-plane detection and user-plane detection. You can
locate network faults as early as possible by detecting the R6 link.

Context
l

The R6 link detection is applicable only to the WiMAX network on which HUAWEI
WASN9770 functions as the ASN-GW.

When the ASN-GW works in non-primary/secondary mode and the signaling plane and
user plane detection are enabled, an alarm is generated if the signaling plane or the user
plane is faulty. In this case, the MS is forced to exit the network.

When the ASN-GW works in primary/secondary mode, the BS detects only the R6 link
that is used currently.
When the BS detects that the R6 link between the BS and the primary ASN-GW is
faulty, the BS automatically connects to the secondary ASN-GW. During the connection
process, services are interrupted.
If the secondary ASN-GW is faulty on the R6 signaling plane after the BS switches to
the secondary ASN-GW, the BS reports an alarm and instructs the MS to exit the
network. If the alarm cannot be cleared, the BS automatically resets or blocks the carrier.
If the secondary ASN-GW is faulty on the user plane, the BS reports an alarm and
instructs the MS to exit the network.
After the primary ASN-GW is recovered, run the SWP GW command to connect the
BS and the primary ASN-GW. You are advised to perform the switchover when the
traffic is low, because services are interrupted during the connection process.

If the local IP addresses of the IP path and signaling channel are the same, the BS can only
use the default signaling-plane detection and you cannot configure the user-plane detection.
In this case, if you run the ADD UPDT command to configure the user-plane detection,
the system displays Can't use same local IP address with signal
channel.

Data Preparation
For details on parameters, see 3.4.4 Preparing R6 Link Detection Parameters (Optional).

Procedure
Step 1 Run the MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG command to configure the signaling-plane detection.
MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG: CCMR6SWITCH=MSGANDCYCLE, CCMCHECKCYCLE=3, CCMCHECKTHRES=3,
CCMRESUMECHECKCYCLE=3, CCMRESUMECHECKTHRES=5, CCMRESETBSTIME=600;

Run the LST CCMR6CHECKCFG command to query the signaling-plane detection.


Step 2 Run the ADD UPDT command to configure the user-plane detection.
ADD UPDT: LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", GWIP="172.16.41.10", TUS=50, TUU=600, TUP=3,
TUN=3, TURP=5, TURN=3;

Run the LST UPDT command to query the user-plane detection.


----End

5.4.6 Configure Radio Parameters


This section describes how to add sectors and carriers to a BS.
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-17

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Task Description
This task enables you to configure sectors and carriers according to the configuration type of
the BS and the specifications of the RRU.

Data Preparation
For details on parameters, see 3.4.5 Preparing Radio Parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the ADD SECTOR command to configure sectors according to the collected data.
For example, to add three sectors, each of which corresponds to a 2T2R RRU, run the following
commands:
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0, TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=1, TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=2, TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;

Step 2 Run the ADD CARRIERBASICINFO command to add a carrier.


l Configure a single carrier.
If one carrier is to be configured, bind the carrier to the RRUCHAIN and specify the location
of the RRUCHAIN. If the RRUCHAIN is chain topology, specify the location as head. If
the RRUCHAIN is ring topology or load balancing topology, specify the location as head or
tail.
For example, to add a carrier to a chain topology (Sector ID = 0; Carrier ID = 0; CPRI Chain/
Ring/Balance Connection ID = 0; CPRI Chain/Ring/Balance Connection Position = HEAD;
Central Frequency = 2550000; Bandwidth = 10 MHz; Segment Number = 0; Start Position
of CDMA Code = 0; Antenna Usage Indication = 2ANT_1; Preamble Index = 0) run the
following command:
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
ANTBITMAP=2ANT_1, PREAMBLEINDEX=0;

l Configure multiple carriers for a single optical fiber.


If two or three carriers are carried on an optical fiber, you need to configure the rate and
convergence mode of the CPRI port by running the MOD CPRIINFO command. For the
4T4R sector, if two carriers are to be configured, you need to change the rate of the CPRI
port to G384 and the convergence mode to TWO before configuring the carriers.
For example, to configure three carriers for a 2T2R sector, run the following commands:
MOD CPRIINFO: SN=3, CPRISPEED=G384, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=THREE;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=0;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=1,
ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=2, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2570000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=2,
ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=2;

For example, to configure two carriers for a 4T4R sector, run the following commands:
MOD CPRIINFO: SN=3, CPRISPEED=G384, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=TWO;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=0;

5-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=1,
ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;

l Configure multiple carriers for two optical fibers.


When multiple carriers are carried on two optical fibers, the RRU is in load balancing
topology. The carriers are bound at the head and tail of the load balancing topology.
For example, to configure two carriers for a 4T4R sector in load balancing topology, run the
following commands:
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=0;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, RCN=0, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=1,
ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;

For example, to configure three carriers for a 4T4R sector in load balancing topology, run
the following commands: Two carriers are carried on one of the optical fibers. Therefore,
change the rate of the CPRI port to G384 and the convergence mode to TWO.
MOD CPRIINFO: SN=3, CPRISPEED=G384, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=TWO;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=0;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=1,
ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=2, RCN=0, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2570000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=2,
ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=2;

Step 3 Run the MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO to configure the authorized carrier bandwidth and
set the switch for controlling authorized functions to ON.
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON, AIRITFENCRYPT=ON,
WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON, ULENHANCEMENT=ON;

Step 4 Run the MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG command to unblock all carriers.


For example, to unblock carrier 0 in sector 0, run the following command:
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;

----End

5.4.7 Configuring the Information About Neighbor Cells and


Triggers
According to the network planning, the information about neighbor cells and triggers for each
sector need to be configured so that an MS can be handed over between service areas.

Data Preparation
For details on parameters, see 3.4.6 Preparing Neighbor Cell Parameters and Trigger
Parameters .

Procedure
Step 1 Run the ADD NBR command to configure the neighbor cell information.
Example:
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-19

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

ADD NBR: CBSID="0000-6400-0A00", NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A0A";

Step 2 Run the ADD TRIGGER command to add a trigger.


For example, to add a trigger (Trigger Type = 0), run the following command:
ADD TRIGGER: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0,TRIGGERID=0, TRIGGERTYPE=0,
TRIGGERFUNCTION=6, TRIGGERACTION=3, TRIGGERVALUE=46, TRIGGERAVERDURATION=10;

----End

5.5 Typical Configuration Examples


This section describes typical configurations of the DBS3900 with examples. During the
deployment, you can refer to the configuration example in corresponding scenario.
5.5.1 RRU3702 in 2T2R O(1) Configuration
In this example, the DBS3900 and ASN-GW do not work in VLAN networking, the BS uses
optical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 2T2R O(1) is used.
5.5.2 RRU3702 in 4T4R O(1) Configuration
In this example, the DBS3900 and the ASN-GW do not work in VLAN networking mode, the
DBS3900 uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 4T4R O(1) is used.
5.5.3 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration
In this example, the BS, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking, the configuration
type is 2T2R S(1/1/1), and two convergence modes (two-carrier non-convergence mode and
two-carrier convergence mode) are used.
5.5.4 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(1/1/1) Configuration
In this example, the DBS3900, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking mode, the BS
uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 4T4R S(1/1/1) is used.
5.5.5 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(2/2/2) Configuration
In this example, the DBS3900, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking mode, the BS
uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 2T2R S(2/2/2) is used.
5.5.6 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(2/2/2) Configuration
In this example, the DBS3900, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking mode, the BS
uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 4T4R S(2/2/2) is used.
5.5.7 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(3/3/3) Configuration
In this example, the DBS3900, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking mode, the BS
uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 2T2R S(2/3/3) is used.
5.5.8 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(3/3/3) Configuration
In this example, the DBS3900, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking mode, the BS
uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 4T4R S(3/3/3) is used.
5.5.9 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration
In this example, the BS, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking, the configuration
type is 2T2R S(1/1/1), and two convergence modes (two-carrier non-convergence mode and
two-carrier convergence mode) are used.
5.5.10 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(2/2/2) Configuration
In this example, the DBS3900, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking mode, the BS
uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 2T2R S(2/2/2) is used.
5-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

5.5.1 RRU3702 in 2T2R O(1) Configuration


In this example, the DBS3900 and ASN-GW do not work in VLAN networking, the BS uses
optical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 2T2R O(1) is used.

Networking Description
Figure 5-7 shows the networking scenario.
Figure 5-7 Networking of the BS

NOTE

l Two DEVIPs are configured for the transmission port, that is, DEVIP1 and DEVIP2. DEVIP1 is for
the OM channel and DEVIP2 is for the IP path and signaling channel.
l The local IP address (OM IP) of the OM channel is the same as DEVIP1, the local IP address of the
IP path is the same as DEVIP2, and the local IP address (SIG IP) of the signaling channel is
172.16.11.123.
l NEXTHOP IP1 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the M2000.
l NEXTHOP IP2 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the ASN-GW.

Typical Connection in 2T2R O(1) Configuration


In this example, the RRU3702 is configured in subrack 60 and is in chain topology. The
RRUCHAIN is chain topology, as shown in Figure 5-8.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-21

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figure 5-8 RRU3702 in 2T2R O(1) configuration

Default Hardware Configuration


l

The default configuration of boards is as follows:


By default, the BMPT is installed in slot 7.
By default, the BBBI is installed in slot 3.
By default, the UPEU is installed in slot 19.
By default, the FAN is installed in slot 16.

The default configurations of the RRU are as follows:


ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=1;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=2;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RCN=0, RN="RRU-00";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, RCN=1, RN="RRU-01";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, RCN=2, RN="RRU-02";

5-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=DISABLE;

Data Preparation
Table 5-3 Basic parameters
Item

Data in the Example

RBSNAME

SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";

BTSINFO

ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;

Gateway
Information

MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";

Clock parameters

SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;

Time parameters

l SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;


l ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10,
PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
l SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900, DST=NO;

Table 5-4 Transmission data


Item

Data in the Example

ETHPORT

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l Port attribute: COPPER
l Rate: AUTO

DEVIP

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l DEVIP of the OM channel: 172.17.11.19/255.255.255.0
l DEVIPs of the signaling channel and IP path:
172.16.11.19/255.255.255.0

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

OM IP

Local IP of the OM channel between the BS and the M2000:


172.17.11.19

M2000 IP

IP address of the M2000 server or peer IP address of the OM channel:


192.168.10.105

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-23

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Data in the Example

IPLGCPORT

l LPT: USERDEF
l LPN: 0
l PT: ETH
l Tx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Rx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Tx committed burst size: 20,000 kbit/s
l Tx excessive burst size: 20,000 kbit/s

Signaling IP address

Logical IP address of the signaling channel or local IP address of the


signaling channel: 172.16.11.123

GWIP

IP address of the ASN-GW or peer IP address of the signaling channel


and IP path: 172.16.41.10

IPPATH

l LPN: 0
l LOCALIP: 72.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
l PEERIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l QT: high
l PATHTYPE: QoS
l DSCP: 48

IPRT

Route from the BS to the M2000:


l DSTIP: 192.168.10.105/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.17.11.1/255.255.0.0
Route from the BS to the ASN-GW:
l DSTIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.16.11.1/255.255.0.0

Table 5-5 Radio parameters

5-24

Parameter

Data in the Example

SECTORID

CARRIERID

TXANTNUM

RXANTNUM

RCN

RCNPOS

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Parameter

Data in the Example

CENTRALFREQU
ENCY

2550000

BANDWIDTH

10 MHz

DLZONETYPE

PUSC_1/3

ULZONETYPE

PUSC_1/3

SUBFRAMERATI
O

29_18

DLSEGMENTNO

CDMAGROUPST
ART

EIRP

370

ANTBITMAP

2ANT_0

PREAMBLEINDE
X

Table 5-6 Neighbor cell parameters


Parameter

Data in the Example

CBSID

0000-6400-0A00

NBRBSID

0000-6400-0A01

Creating NEs and Setting Up an OM Channel


1.

Fill in the DHCP Parameter Template.

2.

On the M2000, choose Configuration > DHCP Configuration Management. Then, the
DHCP Configuration Management interface is displayed.

3.

, select the DHCP parameter


In the DHCP Configuration Management interface, click
template, and then import the DHCP parameters to the DHCP server.

4.

On the main interface of the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology to view
the Main Topology tab page.

5.

On the Main Topology tab page, right-click the ASN-GW to be connected to the NE, and
then choose Search BTS from the shortcut menu. Then, create an NE on the M2000.
The OM channel between the BS and the M2000 is automatically set up.

6.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Run the ACT DHCPCFG command to activate and save the configuration of the OM
channel.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-25

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Configuring the BS Data


On the M2000 client or the Web LMT, perform the following operations by running the
commands in batches.
NOTE

When configuring other 2T2R O(1) sites, modify the following data according to the actual situations.

1.

Configure basic parameters for the BS.


/*Change the site name.*/
SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";
/*Add the operator ID and site ID.*/
ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;
/*Configure the gateway information.*/
MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";
/*Set the clock operation mode.*/
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
/*Set NTP as the time resource.*/
SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;
/*Add the NTP client. */
ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10, PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
/*Set the time zone.*/
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900,DST=NO;

2.

Configure hardware parameters.


/*Remove the configuration that is not required.*/
RMV BRD: SN=6;
RMV RRU: SRN=61;
RMV RRU: SRN=62;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=1;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;

3.

Configure OM and transmission.


/*Set the Ethernet port to the electrical port and the rate to the automatic
negotiation mode.*/
SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, SPEED=AUTO;
/*Set the DEVIP of the OM channel.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.17.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Set the DEVIPs of the signaling channel and the IP path.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.16.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Add a signaling channel.*/
ADD SIGCH: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", PEERIP="172.16.41.10";
/*Add a logical port.*/
ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0,
TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, TXCBS=20000, TXEBS=20000;
/*Add an IP path.*/
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPN=0, LOCALIP="172.16.11.19",
PEERIP="172.16.41.10", PATHTYPE=QOS, DSCP=48, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
/*Add the route from the BS to the M2000 and the route from the BS to the ASNGW.*/
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="192.168.10.105", MASK="255.255.255.0",

5-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", PREF=60;
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="172.16.41.10", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", PREF=60;

4.

Configure the R6 link detection.


/*Configure the R6 signaling-plane detection.*/
MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG: CCMR6SWITCH=MSGANDCYCLE, CCMCHECKCYCLE=3, CCMCHECKTHRES=3,
CCMRESUMECHECKCYCLE=3, CCMRESUMECHECKTHRES=5, CCMRESETBSTIME=600;
/*Configure the R6 user-plane detection.*/
ADD UPDT: LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", GWIP="172.16.41.10", TUS=50, TUU=600,
TUP=3, TUN=3, TURP=5, TURN=3;

5.

Configure radio parameters.


/*Add sector 0, which is configured with two transmit antennas and two receive
antennas.*/
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0, TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
/*Add a carrier.*/
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
/*Enable the basic functions in the license.*/
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M;
/*Activate a carrier.*/
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;

6.

Add a neighbor cell.


ADD NBR: CBSID="0000-6400-0A00", NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A01";

5.5.2 RRU3702 in 4T4R O(1) Configuration


In this example, the DBS3900 and the ASN-GW do not work in VLAN networking mode, the
DBS3900 uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 4T4R O(1) is used.

Networking Description
Figure 5-9 shows the networking scenario.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-27

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figure 5-9 Networking of the BS

NOTE

l Two DEVIPs are configured for the transmission port, that is, DEVIP1 and DEVIP2. DEVIP1 is for
the OM channel and DEVIP2 is for the IP path and signaling channel.
l The local IP address (OM IP) of the OM channel is the same as DEVIP1, the local IP address of the
IP path is the same as DEVIP2, and the local IP address (SIG IP) of the signaling channel is
172.16.11.123.
l NEXTHOP IP1 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the M2000.
l NEXTHOP IP2 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the ASN-GW.

Typical Connection in 4T4R O(1) Configuration


In this example, the RRU3702 is configured in subrack 60 and is in chain topology. The
RRUCHAIN is chain topology, as shown in Figure 5-10.

5-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Figure 5-10 RRU3702 in 4T4R O(1) configuration

Default Hardware Configuration


l

The default configuration of boards is as follows:


By default, the BMPT is installed in slot 7.
By default, the BBBI is installed in slot 3.
By default, the UPEU is installed in slot 19.
By default, the FAN is installed in slot 16.

The default configurations of the RRU are as follows:


ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=1;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=2;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RCN=0, RN="RRU-00";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, RCN=1, RN="RRU-01";

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-29

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, RCN=2, RN="RRU-02";

MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=DISABLE;

Data Preparation
Table 5-7 Basic parameters
Item

Data in the Example

RBSNAME

SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";

BTSINFO

ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;

Gateway
Information

MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";

Clock parameters

SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;

Time parameters

l SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;


l ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10,
PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
l SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900, DST=NO;

Table 5-8 Transmission data


Item

Data in the Example

ETHPORT

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l Port attribute: COPPER
l Rate: AUTO

DEVIP

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l DEVIP of the OM channel: 172.17.11.19/255.255.255.0
l DEVIPs of the signaling channel and IP path:
172.16.11.19/255.255.255.0

5-30

OM IP

Local IP of the OM channel between the BS and the M2000:


172.17.11.19

M2000 IP

IP address of the M2000 server or peer IP address of the OM channel:


192.168.10.105

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Data in the Example

IPLGCPORT

l LPT: USERDEF
l LPN: 0
l PT: ETH
l Tx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Rx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Tx committed burst size: 20,000 kbit/s
l Tx excessive burst size: 20,000 kbit/s

Signaling IP address

Logical IP address of the signaling channel or local IP address of the


signaling channel: 172.16.11.123

GWIP

IP address of the ASN-GW or peer IP address of the signaling channel


and IP path: 172.16.41.10

IPPATH

l LPN: 0
l LOCALIP: 72.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
l PEERIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l QT: high
l PATHTYPE: QoS
l DSCP: 48
Route from the BS to the M2000:

IPRT

l DSTIP: 192.168.10.105/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.17.11.1/255.255.0.0
Route from the BS to the ASN-GW:
l DSTIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.16.11.1/255.255.0.0

Table 5-9 Radio parameters

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Parameter

Data in the Example

SECTORID

CARRIERID

TXANTNUM

RXANTNUM

RCN

RCNPOS

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-31

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Parameter

Data in the Example

CENTRALFRE
QUENCY

2550000

BANDWIDTH

10 MHz

DLZONETYPE

PUSC_1/3

ULZONETYPE

PUSC_1/3

SUBFRAMERA
TIO

29_18

DLSEGMENTN
O

CDMAGROUPS
TART

EIRP

370

ANTBITMAP

4ANT

PREAMBLEIN
DEX

Table 5-10 Neighbor cell parameters


Parameter

Data in the Example

CBSID

0000-6400-0A00

NBRBSID

0000-6400-0A01

Creating NEs and Setting Up an OM Channel


1.

Fill in the DHCP Parameter Template.

2.

On the M2000, choose Configuration > DHCP Configuration Management. Then, the
DHCP Configuration Management interface is displayed.

3.

, select the DHCP parameter


In the DHCP Configuration Management interface, click
template, and then import the DHCP parameters to the DHCP server.

4.

On the main interface of the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology to view
the Main Topology tab page.

5.

On the Main Topology tab page, right-click the ASN-GW to be connected to the NE, and
then choose Search BTS from the shortcut menu. Then, create an NE on the M2000.
The OM channel between the BS and the M2000 is automatically set up.

6.

5-32

Run the ACT DHCPCFG command to activate and save the configuration of the OM
channel.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Configuring the BS Data


On the M2000 client or the Web LMT, perform the following operations by running the
commands in batches.
NOTE

When configuring other 4T4R O(1) sites, modify the following data according to the actual situations.

1.

Configure basic parameters for the BS.


/*Change the site name.*/
SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";
/*Add the operator ID and site ID.*/
ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;
/*Configure the gateway information.*/
MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";
/*Set the clock operation mode.*/
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
/*Set NTP as the time resource.*/
SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;
/*Add the NTP client. */
ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10, PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
/*Set the time zone.*/
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900,DST=NO;

2.

Configure hardware parameters.


/*Remove the configuration that is not required.*/
RMV BRD: SN=6;
RMV RRU: SRN=61;
RMV RRU: SRN=62;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=1;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;

3.

Configure OM and transmission.


/*Set the Ethernet port to the electrical port and the rate to the automatic
negotiation mode.*/
SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, SPEED=AUTO;
/*Set the DEVIP of the OM channel.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.17.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Set the DEVIPs of the signaling channel and the IP path.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.16.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Add a signaling channel.*/
ADD SIGCH: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", PEERIP="172.16.41.10";
/*Add a logical port.*/
ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0,
TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, TXCBS=20000, TXEBS=20000;
/*Add an IP path.*/
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPN=0, LOCALIP="172.16.11.19",
PEERIP="172.16.41.10", PATHTYPE=QOS, DSCP=48, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
/*Add the route from the BS to the M2000 and the route from the BS to the ASNGW.*/
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="192.168.10.105", MASK="255.255.255.0",

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-33

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", PREF=60;


ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="172.16.41.10", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", PREF=60;

4.

Configure the R6 link detection.


/*Configure the R6 signaling-plane detection.*/
MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG: CCMR6SWITCH=MSGANDCYCLE, CCMCHECKCYCLE=3, CCMCHECKTHRES=3,
CCMRESUMECHECKCYCLE=3, CCMRESUMECHECKTHRES=5, CCMRESETBSTIME=600;
/*Configure the R6 user-plane detection.*/
ADD UPDT: LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", GWIP="172.16.41.10", TUS=50, TUU=600,
TUP=3, TUN=3, TURP=5, TURN=3;

5.

Configure radio parameters.


/*Add sector 0, which are configured with four transmit antennas and four
receive antennas.*/
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0, TXANTNUM=4, RXANTNUM=4;
/*Add a carrier.*/
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
/*Configure the license.*/
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
/*Activate a carrier.*/
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;

6.

Add a neighbor cell.


ADD NBR: CBSID="0000-6400-0A00", NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A01";

5.5.3 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration


In this example, the BS, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking, the configuration
type is 2T2R S(1/1/1), and two convergence modes (two-carrier non-convergence mode and
two-carrier convergence mode) are used.

Networking Description
Figure 5-11 shows the network between the BS, M2000, and ASN-GW.
In this example, Huawei Quidway 3500 functions as the layer 3 switch.

5-34

The layer 3 switch is connected to the BS through the TRUNK port. The data of VLAN 11
and VLAN 12 can be transmitted over the TRUNK port.

Two VLANs are defined on the layer 3 switch. VLAN 11 transmits OM data, and VLAN
12 transmits traffic and signaling data.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Figure 5-11 Networking scenario

NOTE

l Two DEVIPs are configured for the transmission port, that is, DEVIP1 and DEVIP2. DEVIP1 is for
the OM channel and DEVIP2 is for the IP path and signaling channel.
l The local IP address (OM IP) of the OM channel is the same as DEVIP1, the local IP address of the
IP path is the same as DEVIP2, and the local IP address (SIG IP) of the signaling channel is
172.16.11.123.
l NEXTHOP IP1 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the M2000.
l NEXTHOP IP2 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the ASN-GW.

Typical Connection in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration


In this example, two RRU3702s are configured in subracks 60 and 61. Figure 5-12 shows the
connections.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-35

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figure 5-12 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) configuration

Default Hardware Configuration


l

The default configuration of boards is as follows:


By default, the BMPT is installed in slot 7.
By default, the BBBI is installed in slot 3.
By default, the UPEU is installed in slot 19.
By default, the FAN is installed in slot 16.

The default configurations of the RRU are as follows:


ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=1;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=2;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RCN=0, RN="RRU-00";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, RCN=1, RN="RRU-01";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, RCN=2, RN="RRU-02";

5-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=DISABLE;

Data Preparation
Table 5-11 Hardware parameters
Item

Data in Non-Convergence
Mode

Data in Convergence Mode

RRUCHAIN

l MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1,


TT=BALANCE, HSN=3,
HPN=1, TSN=3, TPN=2;

RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;

l RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;


RRU

RMV RRU: SRN=62;

RMV RRU: SRN=62;

CPRIINFO

MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0,


SRN=0, SN=3,
CPRISPEED=G245,
CPRIMERGEMODE=DISABLE;

MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0,


SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245,
CPRIMERGEMODE=TWO;

Table 5-12 Basic parameters


Item

Data in the Example

RBSNAME

SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";

BTSINFO

ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;

Gateway
Information

MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";

Clock parameters

SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;

Time parameters

l SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;


l ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10,
PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
l SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900, DST=NO;

Table 5-13 Transmission data


Item

Data in the Example

ETHPORT

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l Port attribute: FIBER
l Rate: AUTO

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-37

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Data in the Example

DEVIP

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l DEVIP of the OM channel: 172.17.11.19/255.255.255.0
l DEVIPs of the signaling channel and IP path:
172.16.11.19/255.255.255.0

OM IP

Local IP of the OM channel between the BS and the M2000:


172.17.11.19

M2000 IP

IP address of the M2000 server or peer IP address of the OM channel:


192.168.10.105

IPLGCPORT

l LPT: USERDEF
l LPN: 0
l Tx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Rx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Tx committed burst size: 20,000 kbit/s
l Tx excessive burst size: 20,000 kbit/s

Signaling IP address

Logical IP address of the signaling channel or local IP address of the


signaling channel: 172.16.11.123

GWIP

IP address of the ASN-GW or peer IP address of the signaling channel


and IP path: 172.16.41.10

IPPATH

l LPN: 0
l LOCALIP: 72.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
l PEERIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l QT: high
l PATHTYPE: QoS
l DSCP: 48

IPRT

Route from the BS to the M2000:


l DSTIP: 192.168.10.105/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.17.11.1/255.255.0.0
Route from the BS to the ASN-GW:
l DSTIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.16.11.1/255.255.0.0

5-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Data in the Example

VLANMAP

l To transmit the OM data through the VLAN 11, run the following
command:
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1",
MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
l To transmit services and signaling data through the VLAN 11, run
the following command:
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1",
MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

Table 5-14 Radio parameters

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Parameter

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

SECTORID

CARRIERID

TXANTNU
M

RXANTNU
M

RCN

RCNPOS

HEAD

HEAD

Non-convergence mode: tail of


the load balancing topology
Convergence mode: head of the
chain topology

CENTRALF
REQUENCY

2550000

2550000

2550000

BANDWIDT
H

10 MHz

10 MHz

10 MHz

DLZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

ULZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

SUBFRAME
RATIO

29_18

29_18

29_18

DLSEGMEN
TNO

CDMAGRO
UPSTART

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-39

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Parameter

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

EIRP

370

370

370

ANTBITMA
P

2ANT_0

2ANT_1

2ANT_0

PREAMBLE
INDEX

32

64

Table 5-15 Neighbor cell parameters


Parameter

Data in the Example

CBSID

0000-6400-0A00

NBRBSID

0000-6400-0A10
0000-6400-0A20

Creating NEs and Setting Up an OM Channel


1.

Fill in the DHCP Parameter Template.

2.

On the M2000, choose Configuration > DHCP Configuration Management. Then, the
DHCP Configuration Management interface is displayed.

3.

, select the DHCP parameter


In the DHCP Configuration Management interface, click
template, and then import the DHCP parameters to the DHCP server.

4.

On the main interface of the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology to view
the Main Topology tab page.

5.

On the Main Topology tab page, right-click the ASN-GW to be connected to the NE, and
then choose Search BTS from the shortcut menu. Then, create an NE on the M2000.
The OM channel between the BS and the M2000 is automatically set up.

6.

Run the ACT DHCPCFG command to activate and save the configuration of the OM
channel.

Configuring the BS Data in Non-Convergence Mode


On the M2000 client or the Web LMT, perform the following operations by running the
commands in batches.
1.

Configure basic parameters for the BS.


/*Change the site name.*/
SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";
/*Add the operator ID and site ID.*/
ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;
/*Configure the gateway information.*/
MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";

5-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

/*Set the clock operation mode.*/


SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
/*Set NTP as the time resource.*/
SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;
/*Add the NTP client. */
ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10, PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
/*Set the time zone.*/
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900,DST=NO;

2.

Configure hardware parameters.


/*Modify the RRUCHAIN to load balancing topology.*/
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=1, TSN=3, TPN=2;
/*Remove the configuration that is not required.*/
RMV BRD: SN=6;
RMV RRU: SRN=62;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;

3.

Configure OM and transmission.


/*Set the Ethernet port to the electrical port and the rate to the automatic
negotiation mode.*/
SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, SPEED=AUTO;
/*Set the DEVIP of the OM channel.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.17.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Set the DEVIPs of the signaling channel and the IP path.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.16.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Add a signaling channel.*/
ADD SIGCH: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", PEERIP="172.16.41.10";
/*Add a logical port.*/
ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0,
TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, TXCBS=20000, TXEBS=20000;
/*Add an IP path.*/
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPN=0, LOCALIP="172.16.11.19",
PEERIP="172.16.41.10", PATHTYPE=QOS, DSCP=48, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
/*Add the route from the BS to the M2000 and the route from the BS to the ASNGW.*/
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="192.168.10.105", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", PREF=60;
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="172.16.41.10", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", PREF=60;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of the OM channel.*/
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of services and signaling.
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

4.

Configure the R6 link detection.


/*Configure the R6 signaling-plane detection.*/
MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG: CCMR6SWITCH=MSGANDCYCLE, CCMCHECKCYCLE=3, CCMCHECKTHRES=3,
CCMRESUMECHECKCYCLE=3, CCMRESUMECHECKTHRES=5, CCMRESETBSTIME=600;
/*Configure the R6 user-plane detection.*/
ADD UPDT: LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", GWIP="172.16.41.10", TUS=50, TUU=600,
TUP=3, TUN=3, TURP=5, TURN=3;

5.

Configure radio parameters.


/*Add sectors 0, 1, and 2, which are configured with two transmit antennas and
two receive antennas.*/

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-41

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0, TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;


ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=1, TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=2, TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
/* Add one carrier to each sector. */
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, RCN=1, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=32;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, RCN=1, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_1, PREAMBLEINDEX=64;
/*Configure the license.*/
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
/*Activate carriers.*/
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;

6.

Add neighbor cells.


ADD NBR: CBSID="0000-6400-0A00", NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A10";
ADD NBR: CBSID="0000-6400-0A00", NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A20";

Configuring the BS Data in Convergence Mode


1.

Configure basic parameters for the BS.


/*Change the site name.*/
SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";
/*Add the operator ID and site ID.*/
ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;
/*Configure the gateway information.*/
MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";
/*Set the clock operation mode.*/
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
/*Set NTP as the time resource.*/
SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;
/*Add the NTP client. */
ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10, PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
/*Set the time zone.*/
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900,DST=NO;

2.

Configure hardware parameters.


/*Modify the RRUCHAIN to load balancing topology.*/
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=1, TSN=3, TPN=2;

5-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

/*Remove the configuration that is not required.*/


RMV BRD: SN=6;
RMV RRU: SRN=62;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;
/*Configure the rate and convergence mode of the CPRI port on the BBBI.*/
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRIMERGEMODE=TWO;

3.

Configure OM and transmission.


/*Set the Ethernet port to the electrical port and the rate to the automatic
negotiation mode.*/
SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, SPEED=AUTO;
/*Set the DEVIP of the OM channel.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.17.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Set the DEVIPs of the signaling channel and the IP path.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.16.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Add a signaling channel.*/
ADD SIGCH: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", PEERIP="172.16.41.10";
/*Add a logical port.*/
ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0,
TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, TXCBS=20000, TXEBS=20000;
/*Add an IP path.*/
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPN=0, LOCALIP="172.16.11.19",
PEERIP="172.16.41.10", PATHTYPE=QOS, DSCP=48, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
/*Add the route from the BS to the M2000 and the route from the BS to the ASNGW.*/
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="192.168.10.105", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", PREF=60;
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="172.16.41.10", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", PREF=60;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of the OM channel.*/
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of services and signaling.
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

4.

Configure the R6 link detection.


/*Configure the R6 signaling-plane detection.*/
MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG: CCMR6SWITCH=MSGANDCYCLE, CCMCHECKCYCLE=3, CCMCHECKTHRES=3,
CCMRESUMECHECKCYCLE=3, CCMRESUMECHECKTHRES=5, CCMRESETBSTIME=600;
/*Configure the R6 user-plane detection.*/
ADD UPDT: LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", GWIP="172.16.41.10", TUS=50, TUU=600,
TUP=3, TUN=3, TURP=5, TURN=3;

5.

Configure radio parameters.


/*Add sectors 0, 1, and
two receive antennas.*/
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=1,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=2,

2, which are configured with two transmit antennas and


TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;

/* Add one carrier to each sector. */


ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=32;

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-43

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, RCN=1, RCNPOS=HEAD,


CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_1, PREAMBLEINDEX=64;
/*Configure the license.*/
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
/*Activate carriers.*/
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;

6.

Add neighbor cells.


ADD NBR: CBSID="0000-6400-0A00", NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A10";
ADD NBR: CBSID="0000-6400-0A00", NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A20";

Configuring the VLAN on the Switch


1.

Configure the OM VLAN (VLAN 11).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 11).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01-vlan11]port
Ethernet 0/1 Ethernet 0/4

This command is used


to allocate ports 1 to 4
for VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 11

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 11.

2.
5-44

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]
[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]ip address
172.17.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

Configure the traffic VLAN (VLAN 12).


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 12).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 12.

[[7A12_R6_01-vlan12]port
Ethernet 0/5 to Ethernet 0/10

This command is used


to allocate ports 5 to 10
for VLAN 12.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 12

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 12.

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]
[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]ip address
172.16.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

5.5.4 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(1/1/1) Configuration


In this example, the DBS3900, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking mode, the BS
uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 4T4R S(1/1/1) is used.

Networking Description
Figure 5-13 shows the network between the BS, M2000, and ASN-GW.
In this example, Huawei Quidway 3500 functions as the layer 3 switch.
l

The layer 3 switch is connected to the BS through the TRUNK port. The data of VLAN 11
and VLAN 12 can be transmitted over the TRUNK port.

Two VLANs are defined on the layer 3 switch. VLAN 11 transmits OM data, and VLAN
12 transmits traffic and signaling data.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-45

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figure 5-13 Networking scenario

NOTE

l Two DEVIPs are configured for the transmission port, that is, DEVIP1 and DEVIP2. DEVIP1 is for
the OM channel and DEVIP2 is for the IP path and signaling channel.
l The local IP address (OM IP) of the OM channel is the same as DEVIP1, the local IP address of the
IP path is the same as DEVIP2, and the local IP address (SIG IP) of the signaling channel is
172.16.11.123.
l NEXTHOP IP1 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the M2000.
l NEXTHOP IP2 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the ASN-GW.

Typical Connection in 4T4R S (1/1/1) Configuration


In this example, three RRU3702s are configured in subracks 60, 61, and 62, and named RRU01,
RRU02, and RRU03 respectively. The RRUCHAIN for three RRUs are chain topology. Figure
5-14 shows the connections.

5-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Figure 5-14 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(1/1/1) configuration

Default Hardware Configuration


l

The default configuration of boards is as follows:


By default, the BMPT is installed in slot 7.
By default, the BBBI is installed in slot 3.
By default, the UPEU is installed in slot 19.
By default, the FAN is installed in slot 16.

The default configurations of the RRU are as follows:


ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=1;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=2;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RCN=0, RN="RRU-00";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, RCN=1, RN="RRU-01";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, RCN=2, RN="RRU-02";

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-47

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=DISABLE;

Data Preparation
Table 5-16 Hardware parameters
Item

Data in the Example

RRUCHAIN

l ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HSN=3, HPN=1;


l ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HSN=3, HPN=2;
l MOD RRU: SRN=60, RCN=0, RN="RRU01";

RRU

l ADD RRU: SRN=61, RCN=1, RN="RRU02";


l ADD RRU: SRN=62, RCN=2, RN="RRU03";

Table 5-17 Basic parameters


Item

Data in the Example

RBSNAME

SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";

BTSINFO

ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;

Gateway
Information

MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";

Clock parameters

SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;

Time parameters

l SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;


l ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10,
PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
l SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900, DST=NO;

Table 5-18 Transmission data


Item

Data in the Example

ETHPORT

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l Port attribute: FIBER
l Rate: AUTO

DEVIP

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l DEVIP of the OM channel: 172.17.11.19/255.255.255.0
l DEVIPs of the signaling channel and IP path:
172.16.11.19/255.255.255.0

5-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Data in the Example

OM IP

Local IP of the OM channel between the BS and the M2000:


172.17.11.19

M2000 IP

IP address of the M2000 server or peer IP address of the OM channel:


192.168.10.105

IPLGCPORT

l LPT: USERDEF
l LPN: 0
l Tx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Rx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Tx committed burst size: 20,000 kbit/s
l Tx excessive burst size: 20,000 kbit/s

Signaling IP address

Logical IP address of the signaling channel or local IP address of the


signaling channel: 172.16.11.123

GWIP

IP address of the ASN-GW or peer IP address of the signaling channel


and IP path: 172.16.41.10

IPPATH

l LPN: 0
l LOCALIP: 72.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
l PEERIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l QT: high
l PATHTYPE: QoS
l DSCP: 48

IPRT

Route from the BS to the M2000:


l DSTIP: 192.168.10.105/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.17.11.1/255.255.0.0
Route from the BS to the ASN-GW:
l DSTIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.16.11.1/255.255.0.0

VLANMAP

l To transmit the OM data through the VLAN 11, run the following
command:
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1",
MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
l To transmit services and signaling data through the VLAN 11, run
the following command:
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1",
MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-49

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Table 5-19 Radio parameters


Parameter

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

SECTORID

CARRIERID

TXANTNU
M

RXANTNU
M

RCN

RCNPOS

HEAD

HEAD

HEAD

CENTRALF
REQUENCY

2550000

2550000

2550000

BANDWIDT
H

10 MHz

10 MHz

10 MHz

DLZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

ULZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

SUBFRAME
RATIO

29_18

29_18

29_18

DLSEGMEN
TNO

CDMAGRO
UPSTART

EIRP

370

370

370

ANTBITMA
P

4ANT

4ANT

4ANT

PREAMBLE
INDEX

32

64

Table 5-20 Neighbor cell parameters

5-50

Parameter

Data in the Example

CBSID

0000-6400-0A00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Parameter
NBRBSID

Data in the Example


0000-6400-0A10
0000-6400-0A20

Creating NEs and Setting Up an OM Channel


1.

Fill in the DHCP Parameter Template.

2.

On the M2000, choose Configuration > DHCP Configuration Management. Then, the
DHCP Configuration Management interface is displayed.

3.

, select the DHCP parameter


In the DHCP Configuration Management interface, click
template, and then import the DHCP parameters to the DHCP server.

4.

On the main interface of the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology to view
the Main Topology tab page.

5.

On the Main Topology tab page, right-click the ASN-GW to be connected to the NE, and
then choose Search BTS from the shortcut menu. Then, create an NE on the M2000.
The OM channel between the BS and the M2000 is automatically set up.

6.

Run the ACT DHCPCFG command to activate and save the configuration of the OM
channel.

Configuring the BS Data


On the M2000 client or the Web LMT, perform the following operations by running the
commands in batches.
NOTE

When configuring other 4T4R S(1/1/1) sites, modify the following data based on the actual situations.

1.

Configure basic parameters for the BS.


/*Change the site name.*/
SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";
/*Add the operator ID and site ID.*/
ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;
/*Configure the gateway information.*/
MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";
/*Set the clock operation mode.*/
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
/*Set NTP as the time resource.*/
SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;
/*Add the NTP client. */
ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10, PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
/*Set the time zone.*/
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900,DST=NO;

2.

Configure hardware parameters.


/*Add two RRUCHAINs, which are chain topology.*/
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HSN=3, HPN=1;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HSN=3, HPN=2;

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-51

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


/*Change the name of the RRU in subrack 60 to RRU01. */
MOD RRU: SRN=60, RCN=0, RN="RRU01";

/*Add an RRU in subrack 61, add a mapping relation between the RRU and the
RRUCHAIN1, and name the RRU RRU02. */
ADD RRU: SRN=61, RCN=1, RN="RRU02";
/*Add an RRU in subrack 62, add a mapping relation between the RRU and the
RRUCHAIN2, and name the RRU RRU03. */
ADD RRU: SRN=62, RCN=1, RN="RRU03";

3.

Configure OM and transmission.


/*Set the Ethernet port to the electrical port and the rate to the automatic
negotiation mode.*/
SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, SPEED=AUTO;
/*Set the DEVIP of the OM channel.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.17.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Set the DEVIPs of the signaling channel and the IP path.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.16.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Add a signaling channel.*/
ADD SIGCH: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", PEERIP="172.16.41.10";
/*Add a logical port.*/
ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0,
TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, TXCBS=20000, TXEBS=20000;
/*Add an IP path.*/
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPN=0, LOCALIP="172.16.11.19",
PEERIP="172.16.41.10", PATHTYPE=QOS, DSCP=48, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
/*Add the route from the BS to the M2000 and the route from the BS to the ASNGW.*/
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="192.168.10.105", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", PREF=60;
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="172.16.41.10", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", PREF=60;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of the OM channel.*/
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of services and signaling.
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

4.

Configure the R6 link detection.


/*Configure the R6 signaling-plane detection.*/
MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG: CCMR6SWITCH=MSGANDCYCLE, CCMCHECKCYCLE=3, CCMCHECKTHRES=3,
CCMRESUMECHECKCYCLE=3, CCMRESUMECHECKTHRES=5, CCMRESETBSTIME=600;
/*Configure the R6 user-plane detection.*/
ADD UPDT: LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", GWIP="172.16.41.10", TUS=50, TUU=600,
TUP=3, TUN=3, TURP=5, TURN=3;

5.

Configure radio parameters.


/*Add sectors 0, 1, and
two receive antennas.*/
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=1,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=2,

2, which are configured with two transmit antennas and


TXANTNUM=4, RXANTNUM=4;
TXANTNUM=4, RXANTNUM=4;
TXANTNUM=4, RXANTNUM=4;

/* Add one carrier to each sector. */


ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, RCN=1, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,

5-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=32;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, RCN=1, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=64;
/*Configure the license.*/
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
/*Activate carriers.*/
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;

6.

Add neighbor cells.


ADD NBR: CBSID="0000-6400-0A00", NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A10";
ADD NBR: CBSID="0000-6400-0A00", NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A20";

Configuring the VLAN on the Switch


1.

Configure the OM VLAN (VLAN 11).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 11).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01-vlan11]port
Ethernet 0/1 Ethernet 0/4

This command is used


to allocate ports 1 to 4
for VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 11

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 11.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]
[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]ip address
172.17.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

5-53

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

2.

Configure the traffic VLAN (VLAN 12).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 12).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 12.

[[7A12_R6_01-vlan12]port
Ethernet 0/5 to Ethernet 0/10

This command is used


to allocate ports 5 to 10
for VLAN 12.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 12

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 12.

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]
[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]ip address
172.16.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

5.5.5 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(2/2/2) Configuration


In this example, the DBS3900, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking mode, the BS
uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 2T2R S(2/2/2) is used.

Networking Description
Figure 5-15 shows the network between the BS, M2000, and ASN-GW.
In this example, Huawei Quidway 3500 functions as the layer 3 switch.

5-54

The layer 3 switch is connected to the BS through the TRUNK port. The data of VLAN 11
and VLAN 12 can be transmitted over the TRUNK port.

Two VLANs are defined on the layer 3 switch. VLAN 11 transmits OM data, and VLAN
12 transmits traffic and signaling data.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Figure 5-15 Networking scenario

NOTE

l Two DEVIPs are configured for the transmission port, that is, DEVIP1 and DEVIP2. DEVIP1 is for
the OM channel and DEVIP2 is for the IP path and signaling channel.
l The local IP address (OM IP) of the OM channel is the same as DEVIP1, the local IP address of the
IP path is the same as DEVIP2, and the local IP address (SIG IP) of the signaling channel is
172.16.11.123.
l NEXTHOP IP1 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the M2000.
l NEXTHOP IP2 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the ASN-GW.

Typical Connection in 2T2R S(2/2/2) Configuration


In this example, two RRU3702s are configured in subracks 60 and 61 respectively. Figure
5-16 shows the connections.
l

Two optical fibers are used to connect the RRU in subrack 60 and the CPRI0 ports on two
BBBIs, and each optical fiber carries two carriers. The RRUCHAIN is load balancing
topology.

Two optical fibers are used to connect the RRU in subrack 61 and the CPRI2 ports on two
BBBIs, and each optical fiber carries one carrier. The type of the RRUCHAIN is load
balancing topology.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-55

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figure 5-16 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(2/2/2) configuration

Default Hardware Configuration


l

The default configuration of boards is as follows:


By default, the BMPT is installed in slot 7.
By default, the BBBI is installed in slot 3.
By default, the UPEU is installed in slot 19.
By default, the FAN is installed in slot 16.

The default configurations of the RRU are as follows:


ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=1;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=2;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RCN=0, RN="RRU-00";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, RCN=1, RN="RRU-01";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, RCN=2, RN="RRU-02";

5-56

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=DISABLE;

Data Preparation
Table 5-21 Hardware parameters
Item

Data in the Example

BBBI

ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=0;

RRUCHAIN

l RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;


l MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=0,
TSN=0, TPN=0;
l MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=2,
TSN=0, TPN=2;

RRU

RMV RRU: SRN=62;

CPRIINFO

l MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245,


CPRIMERGEMODE=TWO;
l MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CPRISPEED=G245,
CPRIMERGEMODE=TWO;

Table 5-22 Basic parameters


Item

Data in the Example

RBSNAME

SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";

BTSINFO

ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;

Gateway
Information

MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";

Clock parameters

SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;

Time parameters

l SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;


l ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10,
PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
l SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900, DST=NO;

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-57

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Table 5-23 Transmission data


Item

Data in the Example

ETHPORT

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l Port attribute: FIBER
l Rate: AUTO
l PT: ETH

DEVIP

l PN: 0
l DEVIP of the OM channel: 172.17.11.19/255.255.255.0
l DEVIPs of the signaling channel and IP path:
172.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
OM IP

Local IP of the OM channel between the BS and the M2000:


172.17.11.19

M2000 IP

IP address of the M2000 server or peer IP address of the OM channel:


192.168.10.105

IPLGCPORT

l LPT: USERDEF
l LPN: 0
l Tx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Rx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Tx committed burst size: 20,000 kbit/s
l Tx excessive burst size: 20,000 kbit/s

Signaling IP address

Logical IP address of the signaling channel or local IP address of the


signaling channel: 172.16.11.123

GWIP

IP address of the ASN-GW or peer IP address of the signaling channel


and IP path: 172.16.41.10

IPPATH

l LPN: 0
l LOCALIP: 72.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
l PEERIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l QT: high
l PATHTYPE: QoS
l DSCP: 48

IPRT

Route from the BS to the M2000:


l DSTIP: 192.168.10.105/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.17.11.1/255.255.0.0

5-58

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Data in the Example


Route from the BS to the ASN-GW:
l DSTIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.16.11.1/255.255.0.0
l To transmit the OM data through the VLAN 11, run the following
command:

VLANMAP

ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1",


MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
l To transmit services and signaling data through the VLAN 11, run
the following command:
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1",
MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

Table 5-24 Radio parameters


Parameter

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

SECTORID

CARRIERID

0, 1

0, 1

0, 1

TXANTNU
M

RXANTNU
M

RCN

RCNPOS

HEAD

TAIL

l Carrier 0:
2550000

l Carrier 0:
2550000

l Carrier 1:
2560000

l Carrier 1:
2560000

l Carrier 1: 2560000

BANDWIDT
H

10 MHz

10 MHz

10 MHz

DLZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

CENTRALF
REQUENCY

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

l Carrier 0: head of the load


balancing topology

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l Carrier 1: tail of the load


balancing topology
l Carrier 0: 2550000

5-59

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Parameter

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

ULZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

SUBFRAME
RATIO

29_18

29_18

29_18

DLSEGMEN
TNO

CDMAGRO
UPSTART

EIRP

370

370

370

ANTBITMA
P

2ANT_0

2ANT_1

2ANT_0

l Carrier 0: 1

l Carrier 0: 32

l Carrier 0: 64

l Carrier 1: 2

l Carrier 1: 33

l Carrier 1: 65

PREAMBLE
INDEX

Table 5-25 Neighbor cell parameters


Parameter

Data in the Example

CBSID

0000-6400-0A00
0000-6400-0A01
0000-6400-0A11

NBRBSID

0000-6400-0A10
0000-6400-0A20
0000-6400-0A21

Creating NEs and Setting Up an OM Channel


1.

Fill in the DHCP Parameter Template.

2.

On the M2000, choose Configuration > DHCP Configuration Management. Then, the
DHCP Configuration Management interface is displayed.

3.

, select the DHCP parameter


In the DHCP Configuration Management interface, click
template, and then import the DHCP parameters to the DHCP server.

4.

On the main interface of the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology to view
the Main Topology tab page.

5.

On the Main Topology tab page, right-click the ASN-GW to be connected to the NE, and
then choose Search BTS from the shortcut menu. Then, create an NE on the M2000.
The OM channel between the BS and the M2000 is automatically set up.

5-60

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

6.

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Run the ACT DHCPCFG command to activate and save the configuration of the OM
channel.

Configuring the BS Data


On the M2000 client or the Web LMT, perform the following operations by running the
commands in batches.
NOTE

When configuring other 2T2R S(2/2/2) sites, modify the following data according to the actual situations.

1.

Configure basic parameters for the BS.


/*Change the site name.*/
SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";
/*Add the operator ID and site ID.*/
ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;
/*Configure the gateway information.*/
MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";
/*Set the clock operation mode.*/
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
/*Set NTP as the time resource.*/
SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;
/*Add the NTP client. */
ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10, PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
/*Set the time zone.*/
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900,DST=NO;

2.

Configure hardware parameters.


/*Add a BBBI.*/
ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=0;
/*Change the RRUCHAIN to load balancing topology.*/
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=0, TSN=0, TPN=0;
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=2, TSN=0, TPN=2;
/*Configure the rate and convergence mode of the CPRI port on the BBBI.*/
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRIMERGEMODE=TWO;
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRIMERGEMODE=TWO;
/*Remove the configuration that is not required.*/
RMV BRD: SN=6;
RMV RRU: SRN=62;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;

3.

Configure OM and transmission.


/*Set the Ethernet port to the electrical port and the rate to the automatic
negotiation mode.*/
SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, SPEED=AUTO;
/*Set the DEVIP of the OM channel.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.17.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Set the DEVIPs of the signaling channel and the IP path.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.16.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Add a signaling channel.*/
ADD SIGCH: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", PEERIP="172.16.41.10";

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-61

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

/*Add a logical port.*/


ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0,
TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, TXCBS=20000, TXEBS=20000;
/*Add an IP path.*/
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPN=0, LOCALIP="172.16.11.19",
PEERIP="172.16.41.10", PATHTYPE=QOS, DSCP=48, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
/*Add the route from the BS to the M2000 and the route from the BS to the ASNGW.*/
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="192.168.10.105", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", PREF=60;
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="172.16.41.10", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", PREF=60;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of the OM channel.*/
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of services and signaling.
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

4.

Configure the R6 link detection.


/*Configure the R6 signaling-plane detection.*/
MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG: CCMR6SWITCH=MSGANDCYCLE, CCMCHECKCYCLE=3, CCMCHECKTHRES=3,
CCMRESUMECHECKCYCLE=3, CCMRESUMECHECKTHRES=5, CCMRESETBSTIME=600;
/*Configure the R6 user-plane detection.*/
ADD UPDT: LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", GWIP="172.16.41.10", TUS=50, TUU=600,
TUP=3, TUN=3, TURP=5, TURN=3;

5.

Configure radio parameters.


/*Add sectors 0, 1, and
two receive antennas.*/
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=1,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=2,

2, which are configured with two transmit antennas and


TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;

/* Add two carriers to each sector. */


ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=2;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_1, PREAMBLEINDEX=32;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=1, RCN=0, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_1, PREAMBLEINDEX=33;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, RCN=1, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=64;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=1, RCN=1, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=65;
/*Configure the license.*/
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,

5-62

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
/*Activate carriers.*/
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2,

6.

CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,
CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,
CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,

BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;

Add neighbor cells.


ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD

NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:

CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",

NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A01";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A10";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A11";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A20";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A21";

Configuring the VLAN on the Switch


1.

Configure the OM VLAN (VLAN 11).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 11).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01-vlan11]port
Ethernet 0/1 Ethernet 0/4

This command is used


to allocate ports 1 to 4
for VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 11

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 11.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-63

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Step

2.

Task

Command

Remarks

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]ip address
172.17.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

Configure the traffic VLAN (VLAN 12).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 12).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 12.

[[7A12_R6_01-vlan12]port
Ethernet 0/5 to Ethernet 0/10

This command is used


to allocate ports 5 to 10
for VLAN 12.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 12

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 12.

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]
[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]ip address
172.16.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

5.5.6 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(2/2/2) Configuration


In this example, the DBS3900, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking mode, the BS
uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 4T4R S(2/2/2) is used.

Networking Description
Figure 5-17 shows the network between the BS, M2000, and ASN-GW.
In this example, Huawei Quidway 3500 functions as the layer 3 switch.
l

5-64

The layer 3 switch is connected to the BS through the TRUNK port. The data of VLAN 11
and VLAN 12 can be transmitted over the TRUNK port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Two VLANs are defined on the layer 3 switch. VLAN 11 transmits OM data, and VLAN
12 transmits traffic and signaling data.

Figure 5-17 Networking scenario

NOTE

l Two DEVIPs are configured for the transmission port, that is, DEVIP1 and DEVIP2. DEVIP1 is for
the OM channel and DEVIP2 is for the IP path and signaling channel.
l The local IP address (OM IP) of the OM channel is the same as DEVIP1, the local IP address of the
IP path is the same as DEVIP2, and the local IP address (SIG IP) of the signaling channel is
172.16.11.123.
l NEXTHOP IP1 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the M2000.
l NEXTHOP IP2 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the ASN-GW.

Typical Connection in 4T4R S (2/2/2) Configuration


In this example, three RRU3702s are configured in subracks 60, 61, and 62 respectively. Figure
5-18 shows the connections.
Each RRU is connected to the BBBI through two optical fibers, and each optical fiber carries
one carrier. The RRUCHAIN is load balancing topology.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-65

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figure 5-18 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(2/2/2) configuration

Default Hardware Configuration


l

The default configuration of boards is as follows:


By default, the BMPT is installed in slot 7.
By default, the BBBI is installed in slot 3.
By default, the UPEU is installed in slot 19.
By default, the FAN is installed in slot 16.

The default configurations of the RRU are as follows:


ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=1;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=2;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RCN=0, RN="RRU-00";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, RCN=1, RN="RRU-01";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, RCN=2, RN="RRU-02";

5-66

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=DISABLE;

Data Preparation
Table 5-26 Hardware parameters
Item

Data in the Example

BBBI

ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=0;

RRUCHAIN

l MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=0,


TSN=0, TPN=0;
l MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=1,
TSN=0, TPN=1;
l MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=2,
TSN=0, TPN=2;
l MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245,
CPRIMERGEMODE=TWO;

CPRIINFO

l MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CPRISPEED=G245,


CPRIMERGEMODE=TWO;

Table 5-27 Basic parameters


Item

Data in the Example

RBSNAME

SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";

BTSINFO

ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;

Gateway
Information

MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";

Clock parameters

SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;

Time parameters

l SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;


l ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10,
PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
l SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900, DST=NO;

Table 5-28 Transmission data


Item

Data in the Example

ETHPORT

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l Port attribute: FIBER
l Rate: AUTO

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-67

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Data in the Example

DEVIP

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l DEVIP of the OM channel: 172.17.11.19/255.255.255.0
l DEVIPs of the signaling channel and IP path:
172.16.11.19/255.255.255.0

OM IP

Local IP of the OM channel between the BS and the M2000:


172.17.11.19

M2000 IP

IP address of the M2000 server or peer IP address of the OM channel:


192.168.10.105

IPLGCPORT

l LPT: USERDEF
l LPN: 0
l Tx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Rx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Tx committed burst size: 20,000 kbit/s
l Tx excessive burst size: 20,000 kbit/s

Signaling IP address

Logical IP address of the signaling channel or local IP address of the


signaling channel: 172.16.11.123

GWIP

IP address of the ASN-GW or peer IP address of the signaling channel


and IP path: 172.16.41.10

IPPATH

l LPN: 0
l LOCALIP: 72.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
l PEERIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l QT: high
l PATHTYPE: QoS
l DSCP: 48

IPRT

Route from the BS to the M2000:


l DSTIP: 192.168.10.105/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.17.11.1/255.255.0.0
Route from the BS to the ASN-GW:
l DSTIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.16.11.1/255.255.0.0

5-68

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Data in the Example

VLANMAP

l To transmit the OM data through the VLAN 11, run the following
command:
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1",
MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
l To transmit services and signaling data through the VLAN 11, run
the following command:
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1",
MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

Table 5-29 Radio parameters


Parameter

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

SECTORID

CARRIERID

0, 1

0, 1

0, 1

TXANTNU
M

RXANTNU
M

RCN

l Carrier 0: head
of the load
balancing
topology

l Carrier 0: head
of the load
balancing
topology

l Carrier 0: head of the load


balancing topology

l Carrier 1: tail of
the load
balancing
topology

l Carrier 1: tail
of the load
balancing
topology

l Carrier 0:
2550000

l Carrier 0:
2550000

l Carrier 1:
2560000

l Carrier 1:
2560000

l Carrier 1: 2560000

BANDWIDT
H

10 MHz

10 MHz

10 MHz

DLZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

ULZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

RCNPOS

CENTRALF
REQUENCY

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l Carrier 1: tail of the load


balancing topology

l Carrier 0: 2550000

5-69

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Parameter

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

SUBFRAME
RATIO

29_18

29_18

29_18

DLSEGMEN
TNO

CDMAGRO
UPSTART

EIRP

370

370

370

ANTBITMA
P

4ANT

4ANT

4ANT

l Carrier 0: 1

l Carrier 0: 32

l Carrier 0: 64

l Carrier 1: 2

l Carrier 1: 33

l Carrier 1: 65

PREAMBLE
INDEX

Table 5-30 Neighbor cell parameters


Parameter

Data in the Example

CBSID

0000-6400-0A00
0000-6400-0A01
0000-6400-0A11

NBRBSID

0000-6400-0A10
0000-6400-0A20
0000-6400-0A21

Creating NEs and Setting Up an OM Channel


1.

Fill in the DHCP Parameter Template.

2.

On the M2000, choose Configuration > DHCP Configuration Management. Then, the
DHCP Configuration Management interface is displayed.

3.

, select the DHCP parameter


In the DHCP Configuration Management interface, click
template, and then import the DHCP parameters to the DHCP server.

4.

On the main interface of the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology to view
the Main Topology tab page.

5.

On the Main Topology tab page, right-click the ASN-GW to be connected to the NE, and
then choose Search BTS from the shortcut menu. Then, create an NE on the M2000.
The OM channel between the BS and the M2000 is automatically set up.

6.

5-70

Run the ACT DHCPCFG command to activate and save the configuration of the OM
channel.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Configuring the BS Data


On the M2000 client, perform the following operations by running the commands one by one,
or on the Web LMT, perform the following operations by running the commands in batches.
NOTE

When configuring other 4T4R S(2/2/2) sites, modify the following data based on the actual situations.

1.

Configure basic parameters for the BS.


/*Change the site name.*/
SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";
/*Add the operator ID and site ID.*/
ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;
/*Configure the gateway information.*/
MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";
/*Set the clock operation mode.*/
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
/*Set NTP as the time resource.*/
SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;
/*Add the NTP client. */
ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10, PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
/*Set the time zone.*/
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900,DST=NO;

2.

Configure hardware parameters.


/*Add a BBBI.*/
ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=0;
/*Change the RRUCHAIN to load balancing
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3,
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3,
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3,

topology.*/
HPN=0, TSN=0, TPN=0;
HPN=1, TSN=0, TPN=1;
HPN=2, TSN=0, TPN=2;

/*Configure the rate and convergence mode of the CPRI port on the BBBI.*/
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRIMERGEMODE=TWO;
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRIMERGEMODE=TWO;
/*Remove the configuration that is not required.*/
RMV BRD: SN=6;

3.

Configure OM and transmission.


/*Set the Ethernet port to the electrical port and the rate to the automatic
negotiation mode.*/
SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, SPEED=AUTO;
/*Set the DEVIP of the OM channel.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.17.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Set the DEVIPs of the signaling channel and the IP path.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.16.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Add a signaling channel.*/
ADD SIGCH: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", PEERIP="172.16.41.10";
/*Add a logical port.*/
ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0,
TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, TXCBS=20000, TXEBS=20000;
/*Add an IP path.*/

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-71

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPN=0, LOCALIP="172.16.11.19",


PEERIP="172.16.41.10", PATHTYPE=QOS, DSCP=48, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
/*Add the route from the BS to the M2000 and the route from the BS to the ASNGW.*/
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="192.168.10.105", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", PREF=60;
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="172.16.41.10", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", PREF=60;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of the OM channel.*/
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of services and signaling.
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

4.

Configure the R6 link detection.


/*Configure the R6 signaling-plane detection.*/
MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG: CCMR6SWITCH=MSGANDCYCLE, CCMCHECKCYCLE=3, CCMCHECKTHRES=3,
CCMRESUMECHECKCYCLE=3, CCMRESUMECHECKTHRES=5, CCMRESETBSTIME=600;
/*Configure the R6 user-plane detection.*/
ADD UPDT: LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", GWIP="172.16.41.10", TUS=50, TUU=600,
TUP=3, TUN=3, TURP=5, TURN=3;

5.

Configure radio parameters.


/*Add sectors 0, 1, and
two receive antennas.*/
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=1,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=2,

2, which are configured with two transmit antennas and


TXANTNUM=4, RXANTNUM=4;
TXANTNUM=4, RXANTNUM=4;
TXANTNUM=4, RXANTNUM=4;

/* Add two carriers to each sector. */


ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, RCN=0, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=2;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, RCN=1, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=32;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=1, RCN=1, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=33;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, RCN=2, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=64;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=1, RCN=2, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=65;
/*Configure the license.*/
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;

5-72

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
/*Activate carriers.*/
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2,

6.

CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,
CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,
CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,

BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;

Add neighbor cells.


ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD

NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:

CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",

NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A01";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A10";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A11";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A20";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A21";

Configuring the VLAN on the Switch


1.

Configure the OM VLAN (VLAN 11).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 11).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01-vlan11]port
Ethernet 0/1 Ethernet 0/4

This command is used


to allocate ports 1 to 4
for VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 11

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 11.

2.
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]
[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]ip address
172.17.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

Configure the traffic VLAN (VLAN 12).


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-73

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 12).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 12.

[[7A12_R6_01-vlan12]port
Ethernet 0/5 to Ethernet 0/10

This command is used


to allocate ports 5 to 10
for VLAN 12.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 12

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 12.

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]
[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]ip address
172.16.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

5.5.7 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(3/3/3) Configuration


In this example, the DBS3900, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking mode, the BS
uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 2T2R S(2/3/3) is used.

Networking Description
Figure 5-19 shows the network between the BS, M2000, and ASN-GW.
In this example, Huawei Quidway 3500 functions as the layer 3 switch.

5-74

The layer 3 switch is connected to the BS through the TRUNK port. The data of VLAN 11
and VLAN 12 can be transmitted over the TRUNK port.

Two VLANs are defined on the layer 3 switch. VLAN 11 transmits OM data, and VLAN
12 transmits traffic and signaling data.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Figure 5-19 Networking scenario

NOTE

l Two DEVIPs are configured for the transmission port, that is, DEVIP1 and DEVIP2. DEVIP1 is for
the OM channel and DEVIP2 is for the IP path and signaling channel.
l The local IP address (OM IP) of the OM channel is the same as DEVIP1, the local IP address of the
IP path is the same as DEVIP2, and the local IP address (SIG IP) of the signaling channel is
172.16.11.123.
l NEXTHOP IP1 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the M2000.
l NEXTHOP IP2 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the ASN-GW.

Typical Connection in 2T2R S(3/3/3) Configuration


In this example, two RRU3702s are configured in subracks 60 and 61 respectively. Figure
5-20 shows the connections.
l

Two optical fibers are used to connect the RRU in subrack 60 and the CPRI0 ports on two
BBBIs, and each optical fiber carries three carriers. The RRUCHAIN is load balancing
topology.

One optical fiber is used to connect the RRU in slot 60 and the CPRI0 port on the BBBI in
slot 2, and the optical fiber carries three carriers. The type of the RRUCHAIN is chain
topology.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-75

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figure 5-20 RRU3702 in 2T2R S(3/3/3) configuration

Default Hardware Configuration


l

The default configuration of boards is as follows:


By default, the BMPT is installed in slot 7.
By default, the BBBI is installed in slot 3.
By default, the UPEU is installed in slot 19.
By default, the FAN is installed in slot 16.

The default configurations of the RRU are as follows:


ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=1;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=2;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RCN=0, RN="RRU-00";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, RCN=1, RN="RRU-01";

5-76

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, RCN=2, RN="RRU-02";
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=DISABLE;

Data Preparation
Table 5-31 Hardware parameters
Item

Data in the Example

BBBI

l ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=0;


l ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=1;

UPEU

ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=PEU, SN=18;

RRUCHAIN

l MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=0,


TSN=0, TPN=0;
l MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HSN=1, HPN=0;
l RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;

RRU

RMV RRU: SRN=62;

CPRIINFO

l MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G384,


CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;
l MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CPRISPEED=G384,
CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;
l MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=1, CPRISPEED=G384,
CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;

Table 5-32 Basic parameters


Item

Data in the Example

RBSNAME

SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";

BTSINFO

ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;

Gateway
Information

MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";

Clock parameters

SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;

Time parameters

l SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;


l ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10,
PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
l SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900, DST=NO;

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-77

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Table 5-33 Transmission data


Item

Data in the Example

ETHPORT

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l Port attribute: FIBER
l Rate: AUTO
l PT: ETH

DEVIP

l PN: 0
l DEVIP of the OM channel: 172.17.11.19/255.255.255.0
l DEVIPs of the signaling channel and IP path:
172.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
OM IP

Local IP of the OM channel between the BS and the M2000:


172.17.11.19

M2000 IP

IP address of the M2000 server or peer IP address of the OM channel:


192.168.10.105

IPLGCPORT

l LPT: USERDEF
l LPN: 0
l Tx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Rx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Tx committed burst size: 20,000 kbit/s
l Tx excessive burst size: 20,000 kbit/s

Signaling IP address

Logical IP address of the signaling channel or local IP address of the


signaling channel: 172.16.11.123

GWIP

IP address of the ASN-GW or peer IP address of the signaling channel


and IP path: 172.16.41.10

IPPATH

l LPN: 0
l LOCALIP: 72.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
l PEERIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l QT: high
l PATHTYPE: QoS
l DSCP: 48

IPRT

Route from the BS to the M2000:


l DSTIP: 192.168.10.105/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.17.11.1/255.255.0.0

5-78

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Data in the Example


Route from the BS to the ASN-GW:
l DSTIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.16.11.1/255.255.0.0
l To transmit the OM data through the VLAN 11, run the following
command:

VLANMAP

ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1",


MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
l To transmit services and signaling data through the VLAN 11, run
the following command:
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1",
MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

Table 5-34 Radio parameters


Parameter

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

SECTORID

CARRIERID

0, 1, 2

0, 1, 2

0, 1, 2

TXANTNU
M

RXANTNU
M

RCN

RCNPOS

HEAD

TAIL

HEAD

l Carrier 0:
2550000

l Carrier 0:
2550000

l Carrier 1:
2560000

l Carrier 1:
2560000

l Carrier 2:
2570000

l Carrier 2:
2570000

BANDWIDT
H

10 MHz

10 MHz

10 MHz

DLZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

ULZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

CENTRALF
REQUENCY

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l Carrier 0: 2550000
l Carrier 1: 2560000
l Carrier 2: 2570000

5-79

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Parameter

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

SUBFRAME
RATIO

29_18

29_18

29_18

DLSEGMEN
TNO

CDMAGRO
UPSTART

EIRP

350

350

350

ANTBITMA
P

2ANT_0

2ANT_1

2ANT_0

l Carrier 0: 1

l Carrier 0: 32

l Carrier 0: 64

l Carrier 1: 2

l Carrier 1: 33

l Carrier 1: 65

l Carrier 2: 3

l Carrier 2: 34

l Carrier 2: 66

PREAMBLE
INDEX

Table 5-35 Neighbor cell parameters


Parameter

Data in the Example

CBSID

0000-6400-0A00
0000-6400-0A01
0000-6400-0A02
0000-6400-0A10

NBRBSID

0000-6400-0A11
0000-6400-0A12
0000-6400-0A20
0000-6400-0A21
0000-6400-0A22

Creating NEs and Setting Up an OM Channel

5-80

1.

Fill in the DHCP Parameter Template.

2.

On the M2000, choose Configuration > DHCP Configuration Management. Then, the
DHCP Configuration Management interface is displayed.

3.

, select the DHCP parameter


In the DHCP Configuration Management interface, click
template, and then import the DHCP parameters to the DHCP server.

4.

On the main interface of the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology to view
the Main Topology tab page.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5.

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

On the Main Topology tab page, right-click the ASN-GW to be connected to the NE, and
then choose Search BTS from the shortcut menu. Then, create an NE on the M2000.
The OM channel between the BS and the M2000 is automatically set up.

6.

Run the ACT DHCPCFG command to activate and save the configuration of the OM
channel.

Configuring the BS Data


On the M2000 client or the Web LMT, perform the following operations by running the
commands in batches.
NOTE

When configuring other 2T2R S(2/3/3) sites, modify the following data according to the actual situations.

1.

Configure basic parameters for the BS.


/*Change the site name.*/
SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";
/*Add the operator ID and site ID.*/
ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;
/*Configure the gateway information.*/
MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";
/*Set the clock operation mode.*/
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
/*Set NTP as the time resource.*/
SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;
/*Add the NTP client. */
ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10, PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
/*Set the time zone.*/
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900,DST=NO;

2.

Configure hardware parameters.


/*Add BBBIs.*/
ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=0;
ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=1;
/*Add a UPEU.*/
ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=PEU SN=18;
/*Change the RRUCHAINs.*/
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=0, TSN=0, TPN=0;
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HSN=1, HPN=0;
/*Configure the rate and convergence mode of the
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G384,
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CPRISPEED=G384,
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=1, CPRISPEED=G384,

CPRI port on the BBBI.*/


CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;
CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;
CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;

/*Remove the configuration that is not required.*/


RMV BRD: SN=6;
RMV RRU: SRN=62;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;

3.

Configure OM and transmission.


/*Set the Ethernet port to the electrical port and the rate to the automatic
negotiation mode.*/
SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, SPEED=AUTO;
/*Set the DEVIP of the OM channel.*/

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-81

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.17.11.19",


MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Set the DEVIPs of the signaling channel and the IP path.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.16.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Add a signaling channel.*/
ADD SIGCH: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", PEERIP="172.16.41.10";
/*Add a logical port.*/
ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0,
TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, TXCBS=20000, TXEBS=20000;
/*Add an IP path.*/
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPN=0, LOCALIP="172.16.11.19",
PEERIP="172.16.41.10", PATHTYPE=QOS, DSCP=48, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
/*Add the route from the BS to the M2000 and the route from the BS to the ASNGW.*/
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="192.168.10.105", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", PREF=60;
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="172.16.41.10", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", PREF=60;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of the OM channel.*/
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of services and signaling.
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

4.

Configure the R6 link detection.


/*Configure the R6 signaling-plane detection.*/
MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG: CCMR6SWITCH=MSGANDCYCLE, CCMCHECKCYCLE=3, CCMCHECKTHRES=3,
CCMRESUMECHECKCYCLE=3, CCMRESUMECHECKTHRES=5, CCMRESETBSTIME=600;
/*Configure the R6 user-plane detection.*/
ADD UPDT: LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", GWIP="172.16.41.10", TUS=50, TUU=600,
TUP=3, TUN=3, TURP=5, TURN=3;

5.

Configure radio parameters.


/*Add sectors 0, 1, and
two receive antennas.*/
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=1,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=2,

2, which are configured with two transmit antennas and


TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;

/* Add three carriers to each sector. */


ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=2;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=2, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2570000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=3;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_1, PREAMBLEINDEX=32;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=1, RCN=0, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_1, PREAMBLEINDEX=33;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=2, RCN=0, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2570000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,

5-82

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_1, PREAMBLEINDEX=34;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, RCN=1, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=64;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=1, RCN=1, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=65;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=2, RCN=1, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=66;
/*Configure the license.*/
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=2, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=2, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=2, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
/*Activate carriers.*/
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2,

6.

BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;

Add neighbor cells.


ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,
CARRIERID=2,
CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,
CARRIERID=2,
CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,
CARRIERID=2,

NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:

CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",

NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A01";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A02";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A10";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A11";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A12";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A20";

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-83

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


ADD NBR: CBSID="0000-6400-0A00", NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A21";
ADD NBR: CBSID="0000-6400-0A00", NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A22";

Configuring the VLAN on the Switch


1.

Configure the OM VLAN (VLAN 11).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 11).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01-vlan11]port
Ethernet 0/1 Ethernet 0/4

This command is used


to allocate ports 1 to 4
for VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 11

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 11.

2.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]
[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]ip address
172.17.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

Configure the traffic VLAN (VLAN 12).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 12).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 12.

[[7A12_R6_01-vlan12]port
Ethernet 0/5 to Ethernet 0/10

This command is used


to allocate ports 5 to 10
for VLAN 12.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 12

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 12.

5-84

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Step

Task

Command

Remarks

the VLAN has the


routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]ip address
172.16.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

5.5.8 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(3/3/3) Configuration


In this example, the DBS3900, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking mode, the BS
uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 4T4R S(3/3/3) is used.

Networking Description
Figure 5-21 shows the network between the BS, M2000, and ASN-GW.
In this example, Huawei Quidway 3500 functions as the layer 3 switch.
l

The layer 3 switch is connected to the BS through the TRUNK port. The data of VLAN 11
and VLAN 12 can be transmitted over the TRUNK port.

Two VLANs are defined on the layer 3 switch. VLAN 11 transmits OM data, and VLAN
12 transmits traffic and signaling data.

Figure 5-21 Networking scenario

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-85

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

NOTE

l Two DEVIPs are configured for the transmission port, that is, DEVIP1 and DEVIP2. DEVIP1 is for
the OM channel and DEVIP2 is for the IP path and signaling channel.
l The local IP address (OM IP) of the OM channel is the same as DEVIP1, the local IP address of the
IP path is the same as DEVIP2, and the local IP address (SIG IP) of the signaling channel is
172.16.11.123.
l NEXTHOP IP1 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the M2000.
l NEXTHOP IP2 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the ASN-GW.

Typical Connection in 4T4R S (3/3/3) Configuration


In this example, three RRU3702s are configured in subracks 60, 61, and 62, and named RRU01,
RRU02, and RRU03 respectively. Figure 5-22 shows the connections.
Each RRU is connected to the BBBI through two optical fibers. One optical fiber carries two
carriers and the other one carries one carrier. The RRUCHAIN is load balancing topology.
Figure 5-22 RRU3702 in 4T4R S(3/3/3) configuration

Default Hardware Configuration


l

The default configuration of boards is as follows:


By default, the BMPT is installed in slot 7.
By default, the BBBI is installed in slot 3.
By default, the UPEU is installed in slot 19.

5-86

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

By default, the FAN is installed in slot 16.

The default configurations of the RRU are as follows:


ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=1;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=2;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RCN=0, RN="RRU-00";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, RCN=1, RN="RRU-01";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, RCN=2, RN="RRU-02";
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=DISABLE;

Data Preparation
Table 5-36 Hardware parameters
Item

Data in the Example

BBBI

l ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=0;


l ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=1;

UPEU

ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=PEU, SN=18;

RRUCHAIN

l RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;


l MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=0,
TSN=3, TPN=2;
l MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=BALANCE, HSN=0, HPN=0,
TSN=0, TPN=2;
l ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=BALANCE, HSN=1, HPN=0,
TSN=1, TPN=2;

CPRIINFO

l MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G384,


CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;
l MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CPRISPEED=G384,
CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;
l MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=1, CPRISPEED=G384,
CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-87

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Table 5-37 Basic parameters


Item

Data in the Example

RBSNAME

SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";

BTSINFO

ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;

Gateway
Information

MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";

Clock parameters

SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;

Time parameters

l SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;


l ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10,
PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
l SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900, DST=NO;

Table 5-38 Transmission data


Item

Data in the Example

ETHPORT

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l Port attribute: FIBER
l Rate: AUTO
l PT: ETH

DEVIP

l PN: 0
l DEVIP of the OM channel: 172.17.11.19/255.255.255.0
l DEVIPs of the signaling channel and IP path:
172.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
OM IP

Local IP of the OM channel between the BS and the M2000:


172.17.11.19

M2000 IP

IP address of the M2000 server or peer IP address of the OM channel:


192.168.10.105

IPLGCPORT

l LPT: USERDEF
l LPN: 0
l Tx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Rx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Tx committed burst size: 20,000 kbit/s
l Tx excessive burst size: 20,000 kbit/s

Signaling IP address

5-88

Logical IP address of the signaling channel or local IP address of the


signaling channel: 172.16.11.123

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Data in the Example

GWIP

IP address of the ASN-GW or peer IP address of the signaling channel


and IP path: 172.16.41.10

IPPATH

l LPN: 0
l LOCALIP: 72.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
l PEERIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l QT: high
l PATHTYPE: QoS
l DSCP: 48
Route from the BS to the M2000:

IPRT

l DSTIP: 192.168.10.105/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.17.11.1/255.255.0.0
Route from the BS to the ASN-GW:
l DSTIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.16.11.1/255.255.0.0
l To transmit the OM data through the VLAN 11, run the following
command:

VLANMAP

ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1",


MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
l To transmit services and signaling data through the VLAN 11, run
the following command:
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1",
MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

Table 5-39 Radio parameters

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Parameter

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

SECTORID

CARRIERID

0, 1

0, 1

0, 1

TXANTNU
M

RXANTNU
M

RCN

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-89

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

l Carrier 0: head
of the load
balancing
topology

l Carrier 0: head
of the load
balancing
topology

l Carrier 1: tail of
the load
balancing
topology

l Carrier 1: tail
of the load
balancing
topology

l Carrier 0:
2550000

l Carrier 0:
2550000

l Carrier 1:
2560000

l Carrier 1:
2560000

l Carrier 1: 2560000

BANDWIDT
H

10 MHz

10 MHz

10 MHz

DLZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

ULZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

SUBFRAME
RATIO

29_18

29_18

29_18

DLSEGMEN
TNO

CDMAGRO
UPSTART

EIRP

350

350

350

ANTBITMA
P

4ANT

4ANT

4ANT

l Carrier 0: 1

l Carrier 0: 32

l Carrier 0: 64

l Carrier 1: 2

l Carrier 1: 33

l Carrier 1: 65

Parameter

RCNPOS

CENTRALF
REQUENCY

PREAMBLE
INDEX

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

l Carrier 0: head of the load


balancing topology
l Carrier 1: tail of the load
balancing topology

l Carrier 0: 2550000

Table 5-40 Neighbor cell parameters

5-90

Parameter

Data in the Example

CBSID

0000-6400-0A00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Parameter

Data in the Example


0000-6400-0A01
0000-6400-0A02
0000-6400-0A10

NBRBSID

0000-6400-0A11
0000-6400-0A12
0000-6400-0A20
0000-6400-0A21
0000-6400-0A22

Creating NEs and Setting Up an OM Channel


1.

Fill in the DHCP Parameter Template.

2.

On the M2000, choose Configuration > DHCP Configuration Management. Then, the
DHCP Configuration Management interface is displayed.

3.

, select the DHCP parameter


In the DHCP Configuration Management interface, click
template, and then import the DHCP parameters to the DHCP server.

4.

On the main interface of the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology to view
the Main Topology tab page.

5.

On the Main Topology tab page, right-click the ASN-GW to be connected to the NE, and
then choose Search BTS from the shortcut menu. Then, create an NE on the M2000.
The OM channel between the BS and the M2000 is automatically set up.

6.

Run the ACT DHCPCFG command to activate and save the configuration of the OM
channel.

Configuring the BS Data


On the M2000 client, perform the following operations by running the commands one by one,
or on the Web LMT, perform the following operations by running the commands in batches.
NOTE

When configuring other 4T4R S(3/3/3) sites, modify the following data based on the actual situations.

1.

Configure basic parameters for the BS.


/*Change the site name.*/
SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";
/*Add the operator ID and site ID.*/
ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;
/*Configure the gateway information.*/
MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";
/*Set the clock operation mode.*/
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
/*Set NTP as the time resource.*/
SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;
/*Add the NTP client. */

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-91

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10, PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;


/*Set the time zone.*/
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900,DST=NO;

2.

Configure hardware parameters.


/*Remove the configuration that is not required.*/
RMV BRD: SN=6;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;
/*Add BBBIs.*/
ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=0;
ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=1;
/*Add a UPEU.*/
ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=PEU SN=18;
/*Change the RRUCHAIN to load balancing
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3,
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=BALANCE, HSN=0,
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=BALANCE, HSN=1,

topology.*/
HPN=0, TSN=0, TPN=2;
HPN=0, TSN=0, TPN=2;
HPN=0, TSN=1, TPN=2;

/*Configure the rate and convergence mode of the


MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G384,
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CPRISPEED=G384,
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=1, CPRISPEED=G384,

3.

CPRI port on the BBBI.*/


CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;
CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;
CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;

Configure OM and transmission.


/*Set the Ethernet port to the electrical port and the rate to the automatic
negotiation mode.*/
SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, SPEED=AUTO;
/*Set the DEVIP of the OM channel.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.17.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Set the DEVIPs of the signaling channel and the IP path.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.16.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Add a signaling channel.*/
ADD SIGCH: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", PEERIP="172.16.41.10";
/*Add a logical port.*/
ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0,
TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, TXCBS=20000, TXEBS=20000;
/*Add an IP path.*/
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPN=0, LOCALIP="172.16.11.19",
PEERIP="172.16.41.10", PATHTYPE=QOS, DSCP=48, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
/*Add the route from the BS to the M2000 and the route from the BS to the ASNGW.*/
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="192.168.10.105", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", PREF=60;
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="172.16.41.10", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", PREF=60;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of the OM channel.*/
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of services and signaling.
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

4.

Configure the R6 link detection.


/*Configure the R6 signaling-plane detection.*/
MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG: CCMR6SWITCH=MSGANDCYCLE, CCMCHECKCYCLE=3, CCMCHECKTHRES=3,
CCMRESUMECHECKCYCLE=3, CCMRESUMECHECKTHRES=5, CCMRESETBSTIME=600;
/*Configure the R6 user-plane detection.*/

5-92

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


ADD UPDT: LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", GWIP="172.16.41.10", TUS=50, TUU=600,
TUP=3, TUN=3, TURP=5, TURN=3;

5.

Configure radio parameters.


/*Add sectors 0, 1, and
two receive antennas.*/
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=1,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=2,

2, which are configured with two transmit antennas and


TXANTNUM=4, RXANTNUM=4;
TXANTNUM=4, RXANTNUM=4;
TXANTNUM=4, RXANTNUM=4;

/* Add three carriers to each sector. */


ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=2;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=2, RCN=0, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2570000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=3;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, RCN=1, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=32;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=1, RCN=1, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=33;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=2, RCN=1, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2570000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=34;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, RCN=2, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=64;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=1, RCN=2, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=65;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=2, RCN=2, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2570000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=350, ANTBITMAP=4ANT, PREAMBLEINDEX=66;
/*Configure the license.*/
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=2, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=2, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-93

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,


AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=2, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
/*Activate carriers.*/
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2,

6.

CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,
CARRIERID=2,
CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,
CARRIERID=2,
CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,
CARRIERID=2,

BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;

Add neighbor cells.


ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD

NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:

CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",

NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A01";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A02";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A10";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A11";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A12";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A20";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A21";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A22";

Configuring the VLAN on the Switch


1.

Configure the OM VLAN (VLAN 11).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 11).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01-vlan11]port
Ethernet 0/1 Ethernet 0/4

This command is used


to allocate ports 1 to 4
for VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 11

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 11.

5-94

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Step

2.

Task

Command

Remarks

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]ip address
172.17.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

Configure the traffic VLAN (VLAN 12).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 12).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 12.

[[7A12_R6_01-vlan12]port
Ethernet 0/5 to Ethernet 0/10

This command is used


to allocate ports 5 to 10
for VLAN 12.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 12

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 12.

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]
[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]ip address
172.16.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

5.5.9 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration


In this example, the BS, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking, the configuration
type is 2T2R S(1/1/1), and two convergence modes (two-carrier non-convergence mode and
two-carrier convergence mode) are used.

Networking Description
Figure 5-23 shows the network between the BS, M2000, and ASN-GW.
In this example, Huawei Quidway 3500 functions as the layer 3 switch.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-95

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

The layer 3 switch is connected to the BS through the TRUNK port. The data of VLAN 11
and VLAN 12 can be transmitted over the TRUNK port.

Two VLANs are defined on the layer 3 switch. VLAN 11 transmits OM data, and VLAN
12 transmits traffic and signaling data.

Figure 5-23 Networking scenario

NOTE

l Two DEVIPs are configured for the transmission port, that is, DEVIP1 and DEVIP2. DEVIP1 is for
the OM channel and DEVIP2 is for the IP path and signaling channel.
l The local IP address (OM IP) of the OM channel is the same as DEVIP1, the local IP address of the
IP path is the same as DEVIP2, and the local IP address (SIG IP) of the signaling channel is
172.16.11.123.
l NEXTHOP IP1 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the M2000.
l NEXTHOP IP2 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the ASN-GW.

Typical Connection in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration


In this example, the RRU3703 is configured in subrack 60.

5-96

When the RRUCHAIN is chain topology, the convergence mode of the CPRI port on the
BBBI is set to THREE. Figure 5-24 shows the connections.

When the RRUCHAIN is load balancing topology, two optical fibers are used to connect
the RRU and the CPRI0 and CPRI1 ports on the BBBI in slot 3. Set the convergence mode
of the CPRI port to TWO. Figure 5-24 shows the connections.

When the RRUCHAIN is ring topology, two optical fibers are used to connect the RRU
and the CPRI0 and CPRI1 ports on the BBBI. Set the convergence mode of the CPRI port
to THREE. In this case, two CPRI links are in cold backup mode. When the CPRI link in
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

work is faulty, the link is automatically switched to the other CPRI link. Figure 5-25 shows
the connections.
Figure 5-24 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration (CHAIN&BALANCE)

Figure 5-25 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(1/1/1) Configuration (RING)

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-97

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Default Hardware Configuration


l

The default configuration of boards is as follows:


By default, the BMPT is installed in slot 7.
By default, the BBBI is installed in slot 3.
By default, the UPEU is installed in slot 19.
By default, the FAN is installed in slot 16.

The default configurations of the RRU are as follows:


ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=1;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=2;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RCN=0, RN="RRU-00";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, RCN=1, RN="RRU-01";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, RCN=2, RN="RRU-02";
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=DISABLE;

Data Preparation
Table 5-41 Hardware parameters
Item

Data in the Example


(CHAIN)

Data in the Example


(BALANCE)

Data in the Example


(RING)

RRUCH
AIN

l RMV
RRUCHAIN:
RCN=1;

l RMV RRUCHAIN:
RCN=1;

l RMV RRUCHAIN:
RCN=1;

l RMV RRUCHAIN:
RCN=2;

l RMV RRUCHAIN:
RCN=2;

l MOD RRUCHAIN:
RCN=0,
TT=BALANCE,
HSN=3, HPN=0,
TSN=3, TPN=2;

l MOD RRUCHAIN:
RCN=0, TT=RING,
BM=COLD, HSN=3,
HPN=0, TSN=3,
TPN=1;

l RMV RRU: SRN=61;

l RMV RRU: SRN=61;

l RMV RRU: SRN=62;

l RMV RRU: SRN=62;

l RMV
RRUCHAIN:
RCN=2;

RRU

l RMV RRU:
SRN=61;
l RMV RRU:
SRN=62;

5-98

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Data in the Example


(CHAIN)

Data in the Example


(BALANCE)

Data in the Example


(RING)

CPRIIN
FO

MOD CPRIINFO:
CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3,
CPRISPEED=G384,
CPRIMERGEMODE
=THREE;

MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0,


SRN=0, SN=3,
CPRISPEED=G384,
CPRIMERGEMODE=T
WO;

MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0,


SRN=0, SN=3,
CPRISPEED=G384,
CPRIMERGEMODE=TH
REE;

Table 5-42 Basic parameters


Item

Data in the Example

RBSNAME

SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";

BTSINFO

ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;

Gateway
Information

MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";

Clock parameters

SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;

Time parameters

l SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;


l ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10,
PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
l SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900, DST=NO;

Table 5-43 Transmission data


Item

Data in the Example

ETHPORT

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l Port attribute: FIBER
l Rate: AUTO

DEVIP

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l DEVIP of the OM channel: 172.17.11.19/255.255.255.0
l DEVIPs of the signaling channel and IP path:
172.16.11.19/255.255.255.0

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

OM IP

Local IP of the OM channel between the BS and the M2000:


172.17.11.19

M2000 IP

IP address of the M2000 server or peer IP address of the OM channel:


192.168.10.105

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-99

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Data in the Example

IPLGCPORT

l LPT: USERDEF
l LPN: 0
l Tx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Rx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Tx committed burst size: 20,000 kbit/s
l Tx excessive burst size: 20,000 kbit/s

Signaling IP address

Logical IP address of the signaling channel or local IP address of the


signaling channel: 172.16.11.123

GWIP

IP address of the ASN-GW or peer IP address of the signaling channel


and IP path: 172.16.41.10

IPPATH

l LPN: 0
l LOCALIP: 72.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
l PEERIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l QT: high
l PATHTYPE: QoS
l DSCP: 48

IPRT

Route from the BS to the M2000:


l DSTIP: 192.168.10.105/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.17.11.1/255.255.0.0
Route from the BS to the ASN-GW:
l DSTIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.16.11.1/255.255.0.0

VLANMAP

l To transmit the OM data through the VLAN 11, run the following
command:
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1",
MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
l To transmit services and signaling data through the VLAN 11, run
the following command:
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1",
MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

5-100

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Table 5-44 Radio parameters

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Parameter

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

SECTORID

CARRIERID

TXANTNU
M

RXANTNU
M

RCN

0
l RRUCHAIN = CHAIN or
RING, RCNPOS = HEAD

RCNPOS

HEAD

HEAD

CENTRALF
REQUENCY

2550000

2550000

2550000

BANDWIDT
H

10 MHz

10 MHz

10 MHz

DLZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

ULZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

SUBFRAME
RATIO

29_18

29_18

29_18

DLSEGMEN
TNO

CDMAGRO
UPSTART

EIRP

370

370

370

ANTBITMA
P

2ANT_0

2ANT_1

2ANT_2

PREAMBLE
INDEX

32

64

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l RRUCHAIN = BALANCE,
RCNPOS = TAIL

5-101

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Table 5-45 Neighbor cell parameters


Parameter

Data in the Example

CBSID

0000-6400-0A00
0000-6400-0A10

NBRBSID

0000-6400-0A20

Creating NEs and Setting Up an OM Channel


1.

Fill in the DHCP Parameter Template.

2.

On the M2000, choose Configuration > DHCP Configuration Management. Then, the
DHCP Configuration Management interface is displayed.

3.

, select the DHCP parameter


In the DHCP Configuration Management interface, click
template, and then import the DHCP parameters to the DHCP server.

4.

On the main interface of the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology to view
the Main Topology tab page.

5.

On the Main Topology tab page, right-click the ASN-GW to be connected to the NE, and
then choose Search BTS from the shortcut menu. Then, create an NE on the M2000.
The OM channel between the BS and the M2000 is automatically set up.

6.

Run the ACT DHCPCFG command to activate and save the configuration of the OM
channel.

Configuring the BS Data


On the M2000 client or the Web LMT, perform the following operations by running the
commands in batches.
1.

Configure basic parameters for the BS.


/*Change the site name.*/
SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";
/*Add the operator ID and site ID.*/
ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;
/*Configure the gateway information.*/
MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";
/*Set the clock operation mode.*/
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
/*Set NTP as the time resource.*/
SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;
/*Add the NTP client. */
ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10, PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
/*Set the time zone.*/
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900,DST=NO;

2.

Configure hardware parameters. You need to select corresponding configuration data


according to the RRUCHAIN.
l Chain topology
/*Configure the rate and convergence mode of the CPRI port on the BBBI.*/
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G384, CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;

5-102

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

/*Remove the configuration that is not required.*/


RMV BRD: SN=6;
RMV RRU: SRN=61;
RMV RRU: SRN=62;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=1;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;

l Load balancing topology


/*Remove the configuration that is not required.*/
RMV BRD: SN=6;
RMV RRU: SRN=61;
RMV RRU: SRN=62;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=1;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;
/*Change the RRUCHAIN to load balancing topology.*/
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=0, TSN=3, TPN=2;
/*Configure the rate and convergence mode of the CPRI port on the BBBI.*/
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G384, CPRIMERGEMODE=TWO;

l Ring topology
/*Remove the configuration that is not required.*/
RMV BRD: SN=6;
RMV RRU: SRN=61;
RMV RRU: SRN=62;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=1;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;
/*Change the RRUCHAIN to ring topology.*/
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=RING, HSN=3, HPN=0, TSN=3, TPN=1;
/*Configure the rate and convergence mode of the CPRI port on the BBBI.*/
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G384, CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;

3.

Configure OM and transmission.


/*Set the Ethernet port to the electrical port and the rate to the automatic
negotiation mode.*/
SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, SPEED=AUTO;
/*Set the DEVIP of the OM channel.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.17.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Set the DEVIPs of the signaling channel and the IP path.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.16.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Add a signaling channel.*/
ADD SIGCH: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", PEERIP="172.16.41.10";
/*Add a logical port.*/
ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0,
TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, TXCBS=20000, TXEBS=20000;
/*Add an IP path.*/
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPN=0, LOCALIP="172.16.11.19",
PEERIP="172.16.41.10", PATHTYPE=QOS, DSCP=48, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
/*Add the route from the BS to the M2000 and the route from the BS to the ASNGW.*/
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="192.168.10.105", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", PREF=60;
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="172.16.41.10", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", PREF=60;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of the OM channel.*/
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-103

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

/*Configure the VLAN mapping of services and signaling.


ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

4.

Configure the R6 link detection.


/*Configure the R6 signaling-plane detection.*/
MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG: CCMR6SWITCH=MSGANDCYCLE, CCMCHECKCYCLE=3, CCMCHECKTHRES=3,
CCMRESUMECHECKCYCLE=3, CCMRESUMECHECKTHRES=5, CCMRESETBSTIME=600;
/*Configure the R6 user-plane detection.*/
ADD UPDT: LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", GWIP="172.16.41.10", TUS=50, TUU=600,
TUP=3, TUN=3, TURP=5, TURN=3;

5.

Add sectors.
/*Add sectors 0, 1, and
two receive antennas.*/
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=1,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=2,

6.

2, which are configured with two transmit antennas and


TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;

Add carriers. You need to select corresponding configuration data according to the
RRUCHAIN.
/*Chain topology: Add one carrier to each sector.*/
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_1, PREAMBLEINDEX=32;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_2, PREAMBLEINDEX=64;
/*Load balancing topology: Add one carrier to each sector.*/
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_1, PREAMBLEINDEX=32;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_2, PREAMBLEINDEX=64;
/*Ring topology: Add one carrier to each sector.*/
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_1, PREAMBLEINDEX=32;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_2, PREAMBLEINDEX=64;

7.

Enable the functions in the license and activate carriers.


/*Configure the license.*/
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,

5-104

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
/*Activate carriers.*/
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;

8.

Add neighbor cells.


ADD NBR: CBSID="0000-6400-0A00", NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A10";
ADD NBR: CBSID="0000-6400-0A00", NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A20";

Configuring the VLAN on the Switch


1.

Configure the OM VLAN (VLAN 11).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 11).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01-vlan11]port
Ethernet 0/1 Ethernet 0/4

This command is used


to allocate ports 1 to 4
for VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 11

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 11.

2.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]
[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]ip address
172.17.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

Configure the traffic VLAN (VLAN 12).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 12).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 12.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-105

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Step

Task

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

Command

Remarks

[[7A12_R6_01-vlan12]port
Ethernet 0/5 to Ethernet 0/10

This command is used


to allocate ports 5 to 10
for VLAN 12.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 12

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 12.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]
[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]ip address
172.16.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

5.5.10 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(2/2/2) Configuration


In this example, the DBS3900, M2000, and ASN-GW work in VLAN networking mode, the BS
uses electrical ports for transmission, and the configuration of 2T2R S(2/2/2) is used.

Networking Description
Figure 5-26 shows the network between the BS, M2000, and ASN-GW.
In this example, Huawei Quidway 3500 functions as the layer 3 switch.

5-106

The layer 3 switch is connected to the BS through the TRUNK port. The data of VLAN 11
and VLAN 12 can be transmitted over the TRUNK port.

Two VLANs are defined on the layer 3 switch. VLAN 11 transmits OM data, and VLAN
12 transmits traffic and signaling data.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Figure 5-26 Networking scenario

NOTE

l Two DEVIPs are configured for the transmission port, that is, DEVIP1 and DEVIP2. DEVIP1 is for
the OM channel and DEVIP2 is for the IP path and signaling channel.
l The local IP address (OM IP) of the OM channel is the same as DEVIP1, the local IP address of the
IP path is the same as DEVIP2, and the local IP address (SIG IP) of the signaling channel is
172.16.11.123.
l NEXTHOP IP1 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the M2000.
l NEXTHOP IP2 is the next-hop IP address from the BS to the ASN-GW.

Typical Connection in 2T2R S(2/2/2) Configuration


In this example, the RRU3703 is configured in subrack 60.
When the RRUCHAIN is load balancing topology, two optical fibers are used to connect the
RRU and the CPRI0 ports on the BBBIs in slots 3 and 0. Set the convergence mode of the CPRI
port to THREE. Figure 5-27 shows the connections.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-107

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Figure 5-27 RRU3703 in 2T2R S(2/2/2) configuration

Default Hardware Configuration


l

The default configuration of boards is as follows:


By default, the BMPT is installed in slot 7.
By default, the BBBI is installed in slot 3.
By default, the UPEU is installed in slot 19.
By default, the FAN is installed in slot 16.

The default configurations of the RRU are as follows:


ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=1;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=2;
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RCN=0, RN="RRU-00";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, RCN=1, RN="RRU-01";
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=62, SN=0, RCN=2, RN="RRU-02";

5-108

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G245, CPRICONVERGENCEMODE=DISABLE;

Data Preparation
Table 5-46 Hardware parameters
Item

Data in the Example

BBBI

ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=0;

RRUCHAIN

l MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=0,


TSN=0, TPN=0;
l RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=1;
l RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;

RRU

RMV RRU: SRN=61;


RMV RRU: SRN=62;
l MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G384,
CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;

CPRIINFO

l MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CPRISPEED=G384,


CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;

Table 5-47 Basic parameters


Item

Data in the Example

RBSNAME

SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";

BTSINFO

ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;

Gateway
Information

MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";

Clock parameters

SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;

Time parameters

l SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;


l ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10,
PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
l SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900, DST=NO;

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-109

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Table 5-48 Transmission data


Item

Data in the Example

ETHPORT

l PT: ETH
l PN: 0
l Port attribute: FIBER
l Rate: AUTO
l PT: ETH

DEVIP

l PN: 0
l DEVIP of the OM channel: 172.17.11.19/255.255.255.0
l DEVIPs of the signaling channel and IP path:
172.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
OM IP

Local IP of the OM channel between the BS and the M2000:


172.17.11.19

M2000 IP

IP address of the M2000 server or peer IP address of the OM channel:


192.168.10.105

IPLGCPORT

l LPT: USERDEF
l LPN: 0
l Tx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Rx bandwidth: 10,000 kbit/s
l Tx committed burst size: 20,000 kbit/s
l Tx excessive burst size: 20,000 kbit/s

Signaling IP address

Logical IP address of the signaling channel or local IP address of the


signaling channel: 172.16.11.123

GWIP

IP address of the ASN-GW or peer IP address of the signaling channel


and IP path: 172.16.41.10

IPPATH

l LPN: 0
l LOCALIP: 72.16.11.19/255.255.255.0
l PEERIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l QT: high
l PATHTYPE: QoS
l DSCP: 48

IPRT

Route from the BS to the M2000:


l DSTIP: 192.168.10.105/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.17.11.1/255.255.0.0

5-110

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Data in the Example


Route from the BS to the ASN-GW:
l DSTIP: 172.16.41.10/255.255.255.0
l RTTYPE: NEXTHOP
l NEXTHOPIP: 172.16.11.1/255.255.0.0
l To transmit the OM data through the VLAN 11, run the following
command:

VLANMAP

ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1",


MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
l To transmit services and signaling data through the VLAN 11, run
the following command:
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1",
MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

Table 5-49 Radio parameters


Parameter

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

SECTORID

CARRIERID

0, 1

0, 1

0, 1

TXANTNU
M

RXANTNU
M

RCN

RCNPOS

l Carrier 0:
HEAD

l Carrier 0:
HEAD

l Carrier 0: HEAD

l Carrier 1: TAIL

l Carrier 1:
TAIL

l Carrier 0:
2550000

l Carrier 0:
2550000

l Carrier 1:
2560000

l Carrier 1:
2560000

l Carrier 1: 2560000

BANDWIDT
H

10 MHz

10 MHz

10 MHz

DLZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

CENTRALF
REQUENCY

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l Carrier 1: TAIL

l Carrier 0: 2550000

5-111

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Parameter

Data in the
Example (Sector
0)

Data in the
Example (Sector
1)

Data in the Example (Sector


2)

ULZONETY
PE

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

PUSC_1/3

SUBFRAME
RATIO

29_18

29_18

29_18

DLSEGMEN
TNO

CDMAGRO
UPSTART

EIRP

370

370

370

ANTBITMA
P

2ANT_0

2ANT_1

2ANT_2

l Carrier 0: 1

l Carrier 0: 32

l Carrier 0: 64

l Carrier 1: 2

l Carrier 1: 33

l Carrier 1: 65

PREAMBLE
INDEX

Table 5-50 Neighbor cell parameters


Parameter

Data in the Example

CBSID

0000-6400-0A00
0000-6400-0A01
0000-6400-0A11

NBRBSID

0000-6400-0A10
0000-6400-0A20
0000-6400-0A21

Creating NEs and Setting Up an OM Channel


1.

Fill in the DHCP Parameter Template.

2.

On the M2000, choose Configuration > DHCP Configuration Management. Then, the
DHCP Configuration Management interface is displayed.

3.

, select the DHCP parameter


In the DHCP Configuration Management interface, click
template, and then import the DHCP parameters to the DHCP server.

4.

On the main interface of the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology to view
the Main Topology tab page.

5.

On the Main Topology tab page, right-click the ASN-GW to be connected to the NE, and
then choose Search BTS from the shortcut menu. Then, create an NE on the M2000.
The OM channel between the BS and the M2000 is automatically set up.

5-112

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

6.

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Run the ACT DHCPCFG command to activate and save the configuration of the OM
channel.

Configuring the BS Data


On the M2000 client or the Web LMT, perform the following operations by running the
commands in batches.
NOTE

When configuring other 2T2R S(2/2/2) sites, modify the following data according to the actual situations.

1.

Configure basic parameters for the BS.


/*Change the site name.*/
SET RBSNAME: RBSNAME="WiMAX";
/*Add the operator ID and site ID.*/
ADD BTSINFO: OPERATORID=100, SITEID=10;
/*Configure the gateway information.*/
MOD GWIP: GWIP="172.16.41.10", GWID="0101-0101-0101";
/*Set the clock operation mode.*/
SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;
/*Set NTP as the time resource.*/
SET TIMESRC: TIMESRC=NTP;
/*Add the NTP client. */
ADD NTPC: IP="192.168.88.168", SYNCCYCLE=10, PORT=123, SYNCSWITCH=ON;
/*Set the time zone.*/
SET TZ: ZONET=GMT+0900,DST=NO;

2.

Configure hardware parameters.


/*Add a BBBI.*/
ADD BRD: BOARDTYPE=BBI, SN=0;
/*Change the RRUCHAIN to load balancing topology.*/
MOD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=BALANCE, HSN=3, HPN=0, TSN=0, TPN=0;
/*Configure the rate and convergence mode of the CPRI port on the BBBI.*/
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=3, CPRISPEED=G384, CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;
MOD CPRIINFO: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CPRISPEED=G384, CPRIMERGEMODE=THREE;
/*Remove the configuration that is not required.*/
RMV BRD: SN=6;
RMV RRU: SRN=61;
RMV RRU: SRN=62;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=1;
RMV RRUCHAIN: RCN=2;

3.

Configure OM and transmission.


/*Set the Ethernet port to the electrical port and the rate to the automatic
negotiation mode.*/
SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, SPEED=AUTO;
/*Set the DEVIP of the OM channel.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.17.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Set the DEVIPs of the signaling channel and the IP path.*/
ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="172.16.11.19",
MASK="255.255.255.0";
/*Add a signaling channel.*/
ADD SIGCH: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", PEERIP="172.16.41.10";

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-113

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

/*Add a logical port.*/


ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0,
TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, TXCBS=20000, TXEBS=20000;
/*Add an IP path.*/
ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LPN=0, LOCALIP="172.16.11.19",
PEERIP="172.16.41.10", PATHTYPE=QOS, DSCP=48, PATHCHK=DISABLED;
/*Add the route from the BS to the M2000 and the route from the BS to the ASNGW.*/
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="192.168.10.105", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", PREF=60;
ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, DSTIP="172.16.41.10", MASK="255.255.255.0",
RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", PREF=60;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of the OM channel.*/
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.17.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=11, VLANPRI=1;
/*Configure the VLAN mapping of services and signaling.
ADD VLANMAP: NEXTHOPIP="172.16.11.1", MODE=SINGLEVLAN, VLANID=12, VLANPRI=2;

4.

Configure the R6 link detection.


/*Configure the R6 signaling-plane detection.*/
MOD CCMR6CHECKCFG: CCMR6SWITCH=MSGANDCYCLE, CCMCHECKCYCLE=3, CCMCHECKTHRES=3,
CCMRESUMECHECKCYCLE=3, CCMRESUMECHECKTHRES=5, CCMRESETBSTIME=600;
/*Configure the R6 user-plane detection.*/
ADD UPDT: LOCALIP="172.16.11.123", GWIP="172.16.41.10", TUS=50, TUU=600,
TUP=3, TUN=3, TURP=5, TURN=3;

5.

Configure radio parameters.


/*Add sectors 0, 1, and
two receive antennas.*/
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=1,
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=2,

2, which are configured with two transmit antennas and


TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;
TXANTNUM=2, RXANTNUM=2;

/* Add two carriers to each sector. */


ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=1;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, RCN=0, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=0, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_0, PREAMBLEINDEX=2;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_1, PREAMBLEINDEX=32;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=1, RCN=0, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=1, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_1, PREAMBLEINDEX=33;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, RCN=0, RCNPOS=HEAD,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2550000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_2, PREAMBLEINDEX=64;
ADD CARRIERBASICINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=1, RCN=0, RCNPOS=TAIL,
CENTRALFREQUENCY=2560000, BANDWIDTH=10M, DLZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3,
ULZONETYPE=PUSC_1/3, SUBFRAMERATIO=29_18, DLSEGMENTNO=2, CDMAGROUPSTART=0,
EIRP=370, ANTBITMAP=2ANT_2, PREAMBLEINDEX=65;
/*Configure the license.*/
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=0, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,

5-114

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning


AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=1, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=0, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
MOD CARRIERLICENSEINFO: SECTORID=2, CARRIERID=1, BASIC=ON, BANDWIDTH=10M,
ETHCS=ON, MOBILITY=ON, TWOANTENNAMIMO=ON, FOURANTENNAMIMO=ON,
AIRITFENCRYPT=ON, WHOLESALE=ON, VOIPENHANCE=ON, BEAMFORMING=ON,
ULENHANCEMENT=ON;
/*Activate carriers.*/
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=0,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=1,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2,
MOD CARRIERBLOCKFLAG: SECTORID=2,

6.

CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,
CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,
CARRIERID=0,
CARRIERID=1,

BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;
BLOCKFLAG=UNBLOCKED;

Add neighbor cells.


ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD

NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:
NBR:

CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",
CBSID="0000-6400-0A00",

NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A01";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A10";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A11";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A20";
NBRBSID="0000-6400-0A21";

Configuring the VLAN on the Switch


1.

Configure the OM VLAN (VLAN 11).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 11).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 11

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01-vlan11]port
Ethernet 0/1 Ethernet 0/4

This command is used


to allocate ports 1 to 4
for VLAN 11.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 11

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 11.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-115

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Step

2.

Task

Command

Remarks

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface11]ip address
172.17.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

Configure the traffic VLAN (VLAN 12).


Step

Task

Command

Remarks

Create a VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to add a VLAN (VLAN
ID: 12).

Define the VLAN.

[7A12_R6_01]vlan 12

This command is used


to display the interface
of VLAN 12.

[[7A12_R6_01-vlan12]port
Ethernet 0/5 to Ethernet 0/10

This command is used


to allocate ports 5 to 10
for VLAN 12.

[7A12_R6_01]interface Vlaninterface 12

This command is used


to enter the interface of
VLAN 12.

On the VLAN
interface,
configure the port
IP address so that
the VLAN has the
routing function.

[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]
[7A12_R6_01-Vlaninterface12]ip address
172.16.11.1 255.255.255.0
(sub)

This command is used


to configure the
interface IP address.
The sub parameter is
optional and is required
when the auxiliary
gateway is configured.

5.6 Optional Commissioning Tasks


The RET antenna and auxiliary equipment (OMB, EMU, EMUA, and APM30H) are optional.
When the preceding equipment is required, you need to configure them after they are installed.

Procedure
l

5-116

When the RET antenna is required in a BS, you need to configure and adjust the RET
antenna. For details, see 4.6 Configuring the RET Antenna (Optional).

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

When the OMB, EMU, EMUA, and AMP30H are required for a BS, you need to configure
relevant equipment and customized alarms according to the requirements of environment
monitoring. For details, see 4.7 Configuring Auxiliary Equipment (Optional) .

----End

5.7 Configuring the BS Information on the ASN-GW


This section describes how to connect the ASN-GW to the downlink of the BS by configuring
BS information on the ASN-GW.

Data Preparation
Parameter

Description

bts-ip

It indicates the signaling IP address of the BS.

bts-info

It indicates the information about the BS to be added. A character string


containing a space is not supported.

bsid

It indicates the BSID of a carrier.


On the M2000 client, run the DSP BSID command to query the BSID
corresponding to the sector ID and carrier ID.

gwid

It indicates the ID of the ASN-GW connected to the BS.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the LMT client of the WASN9770.
NOTE

l For details about how to install and use the LMT, see the documents of the WASN9770.
l For details about the commands and operations related to the configuration of local BS information,
see the documents of the WASN9770.

Step 2 Run the system-view command to enter the system interface.


Step 3 Run the access-view command to enter the access interface.
Step 4 Run the bts command to add the BS information on the WASN9770.
NOTE

l To enable R6 link detection, set control-flag to enable.


l To enable the BS to support the wholesale function, set wholesale-flag to enable.

Step 5 Run the local-bs command to bind the BSID of the carrier on the WASN9770.
Step 6 Run the display bts and display local-bs commands to query the configuration result.
----End

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-117

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

Example
For example, bts-ip = 172.16.11.19, bts-info = WiMAX, control-plane link detection switch =
ON, user-plane link detection switch = OFF, BS wholesale mode = OFF, bsid =
0000-6400-0A00, and gwid = 0101-0101-0101.
<WASN9770> system-view
[WASN9770] access-view
[WASN9770-access] bts bts-ip 172.16.11.19 bts-info WiMAX control-flag enable userflag disable wholesale-flag disable
[WASN9770-access] local-bs bsid 0000-6400-0A00 bts-ip 172.16.11.19 gwid
0101-0101-0101

5.8 Checking the Running Status of the BTS


This describes how to perform a health check and clear alarms.
1.

5.8.1 Testing the VSWR of BTS Antennas


Voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) is also referred to standing wave ratio (SWR). You
can test whether the antenna system is correctly installed according to the VSWR of the
system. The M2000 provides the function of remotely testing the VSWR of BTSs in a
centralized manner. Before testing the VSWR, you can set the threshold and display mode
of the test results so that you can find exceptions in time.

2.

5.8.2 Performing a Health Check


You can check the operating status of a BS using the health-check tool to locate potential
faults, and then rectify the faults according to the check result.

3.

5.8.3 Clearing Alarms


After the OM channel between the M2000 and the BS is set up, you need to check and clear
alarms to ensure successful commissioning. After the commissioning is performed, you
need to check and clear alarms to ensure the normal operation of the BS.

5.8.1 Testing the VSWR of BTS Antennas


Voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) is also referred to standing wave ratio (SWR). You can
test whether the antenna system is correctly installed according to the VSWR of the system. The
M2000 provides the function of remotely testing the VSWR of BTSs in a centralized manner.
Before testing the VSWR, you can set the threshold and display mode of the test results so that
you can find exceptions in time.

Prerequisite
l

The BTS is configured and can be managed.

The BTS does not provide services or the services are isolated.

Context
An excessively large VSWR results in short transmission distance and burned power amplifier
(PA), which affects the normal operation of the communication system. The normal VSWR
range from 1 to 1.5. The M2000 provides default VSWR threshold scheme. Before testing the
VSWR, you can reconfigure the VSWR thresholds according to the default scheme.

5-118

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

CAUTION
The VSWR test disrupts the normal services of the BTSs. Therefore, you can test the VSWR in
light BTS traffic hours or after the BTS services are isolated.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > RF Performance Test > VSWR Test. The VSWR Test window is
displayed.
Step 2 Optional: Set the thresholds and colors of the VSWR for a certain type of NEs.
1.

Click Threshold Set, the VSWR Threshold Setting dialog box is displayed.

Figure 5-28 VSWR Threshold Setting

2.

Set the NE type to WiMAX BTS.

3.

In the Threshold Value Setting area, set the thresholds in descending order and set
State to used. After setting the thresholds, click Apply.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-119

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

You can set a maximum of five VSWR thresholds, including the two default thresholds
provided by the M2000.
4.

In the Color Setting area, click Foreground Color and Background Color to set colors
for the VSWR within the corresponding range.

5.

Click OK.
You can also click Default to retain the default settings.

Step 3 In the VSWR Test window, select one or multiple NEs from the navigation tree in the left pane.
Step 4 Click Test. Then, in the displayed dialog box, click Yes.
Step 5 View the test results.
1.

The VSWR Test dialog box is displayed, showing the test progress. Click Detail to test
the detailed information about the test progress.

2.

When the progress reaches 100%, click Close to close the VSWR Test dialog box. Then,
the test results are displayed on the Test Result tab page.

Step 6 Optional: Save the test results to the local computer.


1.

Click Save.

2.

Set the File Type to *.xls or *.csv.

3.

Set the save path and the filename.

Step 7 Optional: Click Print to print the test results.


----End

Follow-up Procedure
1.

Verify that the antenna system is correctly installed according to the test results.

2.

Ensure that the BTS services are resumed.

5.8.2 Performing a Health Check


You can check the operating status of a BS using the health-check tool to locate potential faults,
and then rectify the faults according to the check result.

Item Description
Table 5-51 Item description

5-120

Item

Description

Device Check

To check the board CPU usage, board status, connection status of the
RRU, and board temperature.

Clock Check

To check the status of the GPS clock, system clock, and IPCLK link.

Config Check

To check the application result of the configured BS data.

Transport Check

To check the transmission status over the R6 interface.

Radio Check

To check the RTWP, status of RRU resources, VSWR, RF


parameters, and carrier status of the RRU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

Item

Description

Environment Check

To check the license information, rotation speed of fans, and online


MS information.

Software Check

To check the version information about the software and BootROM.

NOTE

For details about the health check, see NE Health Check in the M2000 Online Help.

Procedure
Step 1 On the M2000 client, choose Maintenance > NE Health Check. Then, the NE Health
Check dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click New to create a health check task.
Figure 5-29 shows the Create Task dialog box.
Figure 5-29 Create task dialog box

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-121

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

1.

Set the parameters for the task.


l Name: It indicates the task name.
l Scenario: It indicates the task type. Set Scenario to Device Check.

2.

Select a BS from the Select NE group box.


a.

Select a BS from the Unselected NEs list box. You can select multiple BSs at a time
while holding down Ctrl.

b.

Click

. Then, the selected BSs are added to the Selected NEs list box.

TIP

3.

l By clicking
NEs list box.

, you can add all BSs in the Unselected NEs list box to the Selected

l By clicking

, you can remove the selected BSs from the Selected NEs list box.

l By clicking

, you can remove all BSs from the Selected NEs list box.

Under the Time Setting group box, set the time when the task is performed, as shown
inTable 5-52.
Table 5-52 Description of parameters in the Time Setting group box
Mode

Task
Descriptio
n

Operation

Instant

The health
check task is
performed
immediately.

a. Click Next to set Health Check Period.

Scheduled

The health
check task is
performed as
scheduled.

b. Perform Step 2.4.

a. Set the start time of the health check task in the spin
box next to Scheduled.
b. Click Next to set Health Check Period.
c. Perform Step 2.4.
TIP
The start time of the health check task can be set in one of the
following methods:
l Set the start time of the health check in the input box next
to Scheduled.
l Click

or

to adjust the time.

and set the time in the displayed Date/Time


l Click
Selection dialog box.

Periodic

4.
5-122

The health
check task is
performed
periodically.

a. Click Next and set Start Time, Period, and then


Run Times.
b. Perform Step 2.4.

Click Finish. Then, creating tasks is complete.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

The new tasks are listed in the Network Health Check dialog box. The system performs
health check tasks according to the selected mode, and then generates a health check report.
When Process is displayed as 100%, the task is complete.
Step 3 View the check report.
1.

Right-click the completed task and choose View Report from the shortcut menu, as shown
in Figure 5-30.
Figure 5-30 Viewing the check report

2.

In the Health Check Report dialog box, choose the report to be checked.
NOTE

The report is in .html or .doc format.

3.

Click Save As to save the report.


NOTE

The report in .html format can be viewed by clicking Open.

4.

Check the detailed information about faults. If any fault exists, rectify the fault according
to the displayed message.

----End

5.8.3 Clearing Alarms


After the OM channel between the M2000 and the BS is set up, you need to check and clear
alarms to ensure successful commissioning. After the commissioning is performed, you need to
check and clear alarms to ensure the normal operation of the BS.

Task Description
This task enables you to check the current alarms to rectify the faults according to the suggestions
provided by the system before and after the commissioning.
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-123

5 MML-Based Remote Commissioning

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

NOTE

The M2000 provides the engineering state alarm feature. When the BS is managed by the M2000 for the
first time, the engineering state of the BS is TESTING by default.
1. After the commissioning is implemented, check and clear the alarms in the TESTING state.
2. Set the engineering state to NORMAL.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the alarms in the TESTING state. For details, see Activating the Engineering State Alarm
Feature.
Step 2 Clear current alarms according to the alarm handling suggestions or alarm help.
Step 3 After the alarms are cleared, record the process for handling the alarms and optimize the alarm
handling suggestions provided in detailed alarm information.
Step 4 Set the engineering state of the BS to NORMAL. For details, see Deactivating the Engineering
State Alarm Feature.
You can query the alarms in the NORMAL state in the following four methods:
l On the M2000 client, choose Monitor > > Browse Alarm List. In the Filter dialog box,
set inquiry conditions as required. For details, see the M2000 Online Help.
TIP

After the Filter dialog box is displayed, you can press F1 to view help information.

l Select the network element (NE) on the Main Topology tab page of the M2000, and then
right-click Query Alarm/Event to query alarm information.
l On the Web LMT, choose Alarm, and then view the current alarms in the Alarm dialog box.
Double-click any alarm to view the alarm handling suggestions.
l Run the LST ALMAF command to query all active alarms.
----End

5-124

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

6 Local Commissioning

Local Commissioning

When the maintenance channel between the BS and the M2000 cannot be set up automatically,
you need to run commands on the Web LMT to set up a maintenance channel on the BS side.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the Web LMT.
1.

Start the Windows Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the local maintenance port
in the address bar.

2.

Enter the user name and password in the login interface and then click OK.
The default user names are admin and guest. The initial passwords of admin and guest are
admin123 and guest.
NOTE

For details, see the online help of the Web LMT.


After logging in to the Web LMT, press F1 to open the online help of the Web LMT.

Step 2 Configure the BS data.


For details, see 5.4 Configuring the BS Data and 5.5 Typical Configuration Examples.
Step 3 Configure the RET antenna and auxiliary equipment (optional).
For details, see 4.6 Configuring the RET Antenna (Optional) and 4.7 Configuring Auxiliary
Equipment (Optional) .
Step 4 Upgrade the software version on the M2000, configure license resources, and check the operating
status of the BS.
For details, see:
l 9.1 Creating Network Element (NE) Topologies Manually
l 5.3 Upgrading Software Version (Optional)
l 8 Configuring License Resources
l 5.8 Checking the Running Status of the BTS
Step 5 Configure the BS information on the Web LMT of the ASN-GW.
For details, see 4.5 Configuring the BS Information on the ASN-GW.
----End
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-1

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

7 Service Verification

Service Verification

About This Chapter


After the system commissioning is complete, check whether the system operates normally.
7.1 Performing an MS Access Test
This section describes how to test the access success rate of an MS by taking the CPE as an
example.
7.2 Testing the Webpage Browsing Function
This section describes the process for testing whether a PC user can browse webpages through
the browser.
7.3 Testing the FTP Service
This section describes the process for testing whether the FTP service of the WiMAX system is
normal and whether the transmission is smooth by performing uploading and downloading
through the FTP server on a PC.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

7 Service Verification

7.1 Performing an MS Access Test


This section describes how to test the access success rate of an MS by taking the CPE as an
example.

Prerequisite
l

Ensure that the result of health check is normal.

Ensure that the data on the ASN-GW is correctly configured. Ensure that the information
about the BS and service flow parameters is correctly configured.

Choose one sector as the test sector, and then block the other sectors.

Ensure that the no other MS exists in the cell except the test MS.

Ensure that the MS (such as a CPE) is registered, and it can access the WiMAX system
normally.

Ensure that the PC for the test runs properly.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the CPE to the commissioning PC through an Ethernet cable.
Step 2 Set the modulation mode of CPE DL/UL to QPSK1/2 CTC by default. Make the CPE try 20
times to access the network when the CPE is in static state.
Step 3 The time CPE tries to access the network is M, and the time of successful access is N.
Access success rate of the CPE in the static state = N/M x 100%
Step 4 Maintain the speed of the CPE at 60 km/h and make the CPE try 20 times to access the network.
Step 5 The time CPE tries to access the network is M1, and the time of successful access is N1.
Access success rate of the CPE in the static state = N1/M1 x 100%
----End

7.2 Testing the Webpage Browsing Function


This section describes the process for testing whether a PC user can browse webpages through
the browser.

Prerequisite
l

Ensure that the MS accesses the network, and the commissioning PC obtains the IP address
dynamically.

Ensure that the transmission resource and Internet access authority are provided by the
operator.

Procedure
Step 1 On the commissioning PC, open the browser to visit some websites, for example,
www.google.com.
7-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

7 Service Verification

Step 2 Check whether web pages can be displayed normally.


----End

7.3 Testing the FTP Service


This section describes the process for testing whether the FTP service of the WiMAX system is
normal and whether the transmission is smooth by performing uploading and downloading
through the FTP server on a PC.

Prerequisite
l

Ensure that the FTP server is configured.

Ensure that the quality of the file to be uploaded or downloaded is good, and the size of the
file is big enough so that you can have at least 30 minutes to observe whether the
transmission is smooth.

Ensure that the MS (such as a CPE) is registered, and it can access the WiMAX system
normally.

Ensure that a commissioning PC installed with the DU Meter (rate measurement software)
and FTP client software is available.

Ensure that the MS accesses the network.

Ensure that the FTP server can be pinged from the commissioning PC.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the DL/UL modulation mode of the CPE to QPSK1/2 CTC.
Step 2 Connect the FTP client software to the FTP server for the uploading and downloading.
Step 3 Perform the uploading and downloading for at least 30 minutes and observe whether the FTP
service is normal and whether the transmission is smooth. Record the number of disruptions
during the uploading and downloading.
----End

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-3

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

8 Configuring License Resources

Configuring License Resources

The BS functions and resources are controlled by the license. You need to apply for a license
file, configure relevant control items, and distribute the license to each BS first.

Prerequisite
Huawei engineers have applied for the license file according to the required functions.

Procedure
Step 1 Upload the license file to the M2000 server.
1.

Choose License > NE License Management > WiMAX BTS License Management.
Then, the WiMAX BTS License Management interface is displayed.

2.

On the NE list on the left pane of the WiMAX BTS License Management interface, rightclick an NE, for example, DBS3900 WiMAX, and choose Upload > From Client. Then,
the Select License File window is displayed.

3.

Click Select, and then select the license file in the displayed Select window according to
the path where the license file is saved.

4.

Click OK. Then, the license file is uploaded to the M2000 server.

Step 2 Modify NE license resources.


Figure 8-1 shows the allocation information about NE license resources. Figure 8-1 shows the
value of each control item. For example, 171/500, 500 means that there are 500 restricted carriers,
and 171 means that 171 carriers are allocated with licenses.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

8 Configuring License Resources

Figure 8-1 Allocation information about NE license resources

8-2

1.

Choose a license file. Then, the allocation information about license resources for each BS
is displayed on the interface.
Before the license is successfully distributed, the status of Activated of the license is
False. After the license is successfully distributed once, the status changes to True.

2.

Double-click an NE. Then, the Modify window is displayed. You can modify the license
resource of an NE. You can also select multiple NEs, right-click to choose Modify from
the shortcut menu. The Modify window is displayed. You can modify the license resources
of multiple NEs.
Figure 8-2 shows the Modify window.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

8 Configuring License Resources

Figure 8-2 Modify window

3.

In the Modify window, modify the values of the control items.

4.

Click OK.

Step 3 Distribute the license resources.


1.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Right-click the license to be distributed, and then select Distribute,


as shown in Figure 8-3.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-3

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

8 Configuring License Resources

Figure 8-3 Distributing license resources

2.

Click Yes.
NOTE

l The license distribution is for all NEs. If the license distribution of one NE is faulty, the license
resources of other NEs are not affected.
l In the License Task window, you can view the license distribution progress. In addition, you
can view the license distribution in details by double-clicking a license distribution task.

Step 4 Verify the distribution results.


1.

8-4

Check whether the license is successfully distributed.


If Activated is True, and LicenseState is Normal, you can infer that the license is
available, as shown in Figure 8-4.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

8 Configuring License Resources

Figure 8-4 License status

2.

Run the DSP LICENSE command to query the configuration of the license.

3.

Run the DSP LICENSESTATUS command to query the license status of a BS.

4.

Run the DSP LICENSEINFO command to query the number of available control items
allocated to each BS.

----End

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-5

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

Appendixes

About This Chapter


The appendixes provide the commissioning record table and reference information.
9.1 Creating Network Element (NE) Topologies Manually
This section describes how to manually create NE topologies of a single BS in the M2000
topology.
9.2 Synchronizing Data on the Existing Network
This section describes how to obtain the latest configuration data of WiMAX BTSs on the
existing network by performing a synchronization operation.
9.3 Configuring the BS Data by Importing the Template
This section describes how to configure the BS data by importing the WCS template.
9.4 Managing WiMAX BTS Commissioning Tasks
This section describes how to manage commissioning tasks on the M2000. You can modify task
parameters and start or stop WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks on the M2000.
9.5 Security Management
Security management is implemented to manage OM users, local users, and user authority.
9.6 Commissioning Record Form
In the commissioning record form, you can record the problems in commissioning and handling
processes for reference to future commissioning.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-1

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

9.1 Creating Network Element (NE) Topologies Manually


This section describes how to manually create NE topologies of a single BS in the M2000
topology.

Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology to view the
Main Topology tab page.
Step 2 Double-click an ASN-GW (such as ASNGW) in Physical Root of the Main Topology tab page.
Then, the physical topology of the ASN-GW is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1 Physical topology

Step 3 Right-click New > Create Topo Object in the topology interface. Then, the Create Topo
Object dialog box is open.
Step 4 Choose Single Create > NE > Access Network Series in the navigation tree of the Create Topo
Object dialog box. Then, choose an NE type, as shown in Figure 9-2.

9-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

Figure 9-2 Creating a topology object

Step 5 Set parameters in the Create Topo Object dialog box.


The values of the parameters marked with * must be set. Name represents the topology name
of a BS. IP Address represents the IP address of the OM of a BS. Subarea represents the M2000
server.
Step 6 Click OK. Then, the created NEs are displayed on the Main Topology tab page.
----End

9.2 Synchronizing Data on the Existing Network


This section describes how to obtain the latest configuration data of WiMAX BTSs on the
existing network by performing a synchronization operation.

Context
After you enable the M2000 to synchronize the configuration data of WiMAX BTSs on the
existing network through any project in the M2000 system, the data of these WiMAX BTSs in
all projects is updated, and the synchronization tasks in the system are displayed in the task
progress area. After the synchronization is complete, you need to manually update the navigation
tree to load the latest data on the existing network.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WiMAX Enhanced Configuration on the M2000 client to open the
WiMAX Enhanced Configuration main window.
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-3

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

Step 2 Click Refresh on the toolbar. The Please select the NE to synchronize dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 In the dialog box, select one or multiple WiMAX BTSs whose data need to be synchronized,
and then click OK to start data synchronization.
The progress of data synchronization is displayed in the task progress window. You can doubleclick a synchronization task to view the task details such as WiMAX BTS information and
synchronization status.
TIP

When handling data of a large number of NEs, you can type keywords of the NE to be filtered in the
text box in the upper part of the NE navigation tree. The system displays the NEs that meet the filtering
criteria in the navigation tree.

Step 4 After the synchronization is complete, right-click on the navigation tree and then choose
Reload from the shortcut menu to update the navigation tree.
----End

9.3 Configuring the BS Data by Importing the Template


This section describes how to configure the BS data by importing the WCS template.

Task Description
You need to import the planned configuration data specified in the WCS template. When
importing the configuration data, you must import the device parameters before importing
wireless parameters.
NOTE

l There are two types of WCS templates: DEVICE and WIRELESS.


l The DEVICE is used to configure BS information, clock information, time information, hardware
parameters, and transmission parameters. The default template is Default Device Parameter.xls.
l The WIRELESS is used to configure radio parameters. The default template is Default Wireless
Parameter.xls.
l The NEVERSION filled in the Basic Information sheet of the template need to be consistent with
the version of the corresponding M2000 adaptation layer. Otherwise, importing data fails.
l The template in this document is only for reference. Obtain the right template from software package
delivered with the version during the deployment.

Procedure
Step 1 Fill the BS data in the WCS parameter template.
Step 2 Save the filled WCS template to a path in the PC of the M2000 client, for example, E:
\Config.
Step 3 On the M2000 client, choose Configuration > WiMAX Enhanced Configuration. The
WiMAX Enhanced Configuration tab page is displayed.
Step 4 Create a project.

9-4

1.

On the WiMAX Enhanced Configuration tab page, click Project, and then select New.

2.

In the New Project dialog box, enter a project name, for example, newproject.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

If a project is opened, you need to close it. Otherwise, you cannot create a new project.
3.

Click OK.
A project is created.

Step 5 Import device parameters.


1.

On the WiMAX Enhanced Configuration tab page, click Import, select Device
Parameter from the Select file type drop-down list box, and then select device parameter
files from the Select a file combo box, as shown in Figure 9-3.

Figure 9-3 Selecting configuration files

CAUTION
The type of the parameter files selected from the Select a file combo box must be consistent
with the template type selected from the Select file type drop-down list box. If Device
Parameter is selected from the Select file type drop-down list box, but the wireless
parameter files are selected from the Select a file combo box, a message indicating an
exception is displayed.
2.

Click Open. Then, the WCS checks the files to be imported.

3.

Click Import to import the data.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-5

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

In the Import Result dialog box, the import results are displayed. If Import partially
succeeded is displayed, click Import partially succeeded to view the causes. Then, adjust
the data in the template according to the prompt message.
Step 6 Import wireless parameters.
NOTE

The methods of importing the wireless parameters and device parameters are the same. For details about
how to import wireless parameters, see Step 5.

Step 7 Adjust the data in the project.


After the data is imported, the planned BS names in the WCS parameter template are displayed
under the Planned BTS node in the NE navigation tree on the left of the WiMAX Enhanced
Configuration tab page.
When you choose one or multiple BSs, the corresponding data is displayed in the window on
the right. When you double-click a parameter, the background color changes to yellow. In this
case, you can modify this parameter as show in Figure 9-4.
Figure 9-4 Adjusting the data in the project

----End

9-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

9.4 Managing WiMAX BTS Commissioning Tasks


This section describes how to manage commissioning tasks on the M2000. You can modify task
parameters and start or stop WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks on the M2000.
9.4.1 Adding or Deleting BTSs to Be Commissioned
You can add or delete the BTSs to be commissioned in a commissioning project. The M2000
creates a commissioning task for each WiMAX BTS in a commissioning project. To adjust
commissioning items in the project, you can only delete the project and then re-create the project
and re-select commissioning items.
9.4.2 Starting/Stopping Commissioning Tasks
You can stop commissioning tasks that do not need to be performed immediately according to
the actual needs. When it is time to run those tasks, you can restart them.
9.4.3 Updating Configuration Scripts
You can update the configuration scripts for the WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks that are
running.

9.4.1 Adding or Deleting BTSs to Be Commissioned


You can add or delete the BTSs to be commissioned in a commissioning project. The M2000
creates a commissioning task for each WiMAX BTS in a commissioning project. To adjust
commissioning items in the project, you can only delete the project and then re-create the project
and re-select commissioning items.

Prerequisite
WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks have been created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Commissioning to open the Commissioning window.
Step 2 Perform the following operations to add or delete the BTSs to be commissioned according to
the actual requirements.
If you need to...

Then...

Add BTSs to be commissioned

1. Select an incomplete project from Projects and click


Add NEs.
2. Select one or multiple WiMAX BTSs to be added, and
then click Next.
Figure 9-5 shows the window for adding BTSs.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-7

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

If you need to...

Then...

Delete BTSs to be commissioned l Deleting BTSs on the Projects tab:


1. Select a non-running project from Projects.
2. Right-click the WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks
to be deleted and choose Delete NE from
Project from the shortcut menu.
l Deleting BTSs on the NE List tab:
1. Select WiMAX BTSs by BTS name from NE
List. You can locate the required WiMAX BTSs
quickly by entering key words in the Search text
box.
2. Right-click the commissioning tasks to be deleted
and choose Delete NE from Project from the
shortcut menu.
Figure 9-6 shows the window for deleting BTSs to be
commissioned.

Figure 9-5 Adding BTSs to be commissioned

9-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

Figure 9-6 Deleting BTSs to be commissioned

----End

9.4.2 Starting/Stopping Commissioning Tasks


You can stop commissioning tasks that do not need to be performed immediately according to
the actual needs. When it is time to run those tasks, you can restart them.

Prerequisite
WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks have been created.

Context
If a commissioning project consists of multiple commissioning tasks, the project does not appear
under the Finished node until all commissioning tasks are executed.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Commissioning to open the Commissioning window.
Step 2 Select the commissioning project to which the WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks belong from
Projects.
Select WiMAX BTSs by BTS name from the NE List tab.
Step 3 Start or stop commissioning tasks as required in the commissioning task list on the right.
Figure 9-7 shows the Commissioning window.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-9

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

If you need to...

Then...

Start the BTS commissioning tasks l Select the commissioning project to which the
commissioning tasks to be started belong under the
Waiting node and click Run.
l Select the commissioning project to which the
commissioning tasks to be started belong under the
Running node, select and right-click the
commissioning tasks in the right pane, and choose
Start Commissioning Task from the shortcut
menu.
NOTE
Only commissioning tasks whose commissioning
progress remains at 0% or 100% can be started.

l Select the commissioning project to which the


failed commissioning tasks belong under the
Finished node, select and right-click the failed
commissioning tasks in the right pane, and choose
Start Commissioning Task from the shortcut
menu to restart the tasks.
Stop the BTS commissioning tasks Select the commissioning project to which the
commissioning tasks to be stopped belong under the
Running node, select and right-click the
commissioning tasks in the right pane, and choose Stop
Commissioning Task from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
Only commissioning tasks whose commissioning progress is
not 0% or 100% can be started.

Figure 9-7 Commissioning window

----End
9-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

9.4.3 Updating Configuration Scripts


You can update the configuration scripts for the WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks that are
running.

Prerequisite
l

WiMAX BTS commissioning tasks have been created.

The Download Configuration File commissioning item of the commissioning project has
been selected.

Context
You can use the WCS to generate the configuration files of WiMAX BTSs. For details, see
Exporting an MML Script File.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Commissioning to open the Commissioning window.
Step 2 Select the commissioning project for which configuration files need to be re-uploaded under the
Running node in Projects and click Uploading new configuration file.
Step 3 Click Next in the wizard for modifying commissioning projects.
Step 4 Click Uploading New Configuration File and choose whether to upload the files from the client
or server.
Figure 9-8 Re-uploading configuration files.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-11

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

If you need to...

Then...

Upload configuration files from the


client

1. Specify the paths for uploading the


configuration files in the Choose the directory
of configuration file dialog box.
NOTE
The configuration files of WiMAX BTSs are stored
in the folders named after the corresponding
WiMAX BTS types.
In this case, you need to specify the paths to the
corresponding folders. Then, the system
automatically uploads the configuration files to the
folders. For example, the configuration files of
BTS_001 is stored in C:\configuration_file
\BTS_001. To upload the configuration files of
BTS_001, you need to specify C:
\configuration_file as the path. Then, the system
uploads the configuration files in the BTS_001
folder to the M2000 server in batches.

2. Click Upload Config To Server to upload the


configuration files of the corresponding
WiMAX BTSs to the M2000 server.
Upload configuration files from the
server

If you intend to upload configuration files of


WiMAX BTSs from the server, the M2000 checks
whether the configuration files of the WiMAX
BTSs exist on the server. If the files exist on the
server, the M2000 uploads the files automatically.
Otherwise, the M2000 displays an error message.
NOTE
When performing Generating Configuration Scripts
or Automatically Creating Commissioning Tasks,
you can click Generate Commissioning File to
generate the configuration files of WiMAX BTSs on the
M2000 server.

Step 5 Click Finish.


----End

9.5 Security Management


Security management is implemented to manage OM users, local users, and user authority.
9.5.1 Login Mode
This describes user types and login modes.
9.5.2 OM User Management
OM user management is implemented to manage OM users and user authority on the M2000
client.
9.5.3 Local User Management
9-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

Local user management is implemented to query, add, delete, and modify user information set
user rights.

9.5.1 Login Mode


This describes user types and login modes.

User Type
The user account for BS management is categorized into the OM user and local user.
l

An OM user refers to a user who implements the OM function for the entire network or a
specified BS through the M2000. The M2000 implements management of the account,
password, and authority for an OM user.

A local user refers to a user who implements the OM function for a specified BS through
the Web LMT. The BS implements management of the account, password, and authority
for a local user.

Login Mode for an OM User


An OM user can log in to the BS through the M2000 client or the Web LMT.
l

Generally, an OM user implements OM by logging in to the M2000 client, as shown in


Figure 9-9.
NOTE

l The user name for the first login is admin, and the password is null.
l If you do not have the user name and password, contact the network management personnel.
l Sever refers to the M2000 server connected to the client.

Figure 9-9 Logging in to the M2000 client by an OM user

An OM user can log in to the BS through the Web LMT for operations on the BS.
If an OM user logs in to the BS through the Web LMT, User Type is set to EMS,
indicating that an OM user is logging in, as shown in Figure 9-10.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-13

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

After the information of the OM user is verified through the M2000, the OM user can
log in to the BS.
On the Web LMT, the operations of the OM user function on the BS through the M2000,
and the operation results are returned on the Web LMT.
Figure 9-10 Logging in to the BS through the Web LMT by an OM user

Login Mode for a Local User


A local user can log in to the BS only through the Web LMT.

9-14

If a local user logs in to the BS through the Web LMT, User Type is set to Local, indicating
that a local user is logging in, as shown in Figure 9-11.

The information of a local user is verified by the BS.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

Figure 9-11 Logging in to the BS by a local user

9.5.2 OM User Management


OM user management is implemented to manage OM users and user authority on the M2000
client.

Prerequisite
An user in the SMMangeers user group, for example, admin, has logged in to the M2000 clinet.

OM User Group
The M2000 provides four groups, that is, SMManagers, Administrators, Operators, and Guests.
l

The users in the SMManagers group have all security authorities such as user management,
user password reconfiguration, and security log query.

The users in the Administrators group have the authority to view all the objects under
management and authorities that the users in the SMManagers group do not have.

The authority for the users in the Guests and Operators groups can be set according to actual
requirements.

The user admin belongs to both the Administrators group and the SMManagers group.

You cannot modify the authorities for users in the SMManagers and Administrators groups.

Task Description
OM user management invloves the following tasks:
l

Creating an OM user

Modifying an OM user

Removing an OM user group

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-15

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

Removing an OM user

Monitoring an OM user
NOTE

For details, see Security Management in M2000 Online Help and Managing the M2000 Users (SUSE) in
M2000 Administrator Guide (ATAE, SUSE10).

9.5.3 Local User Management


Local user management is implemented to query, add, delete, and modify user information set
user rights.

Prerequisite
You have logged in to the BS through the M2000 client or Web LMT.

Task Description
This task enables you to set the status of non-default local users on the M2000 client. To
implement other settings, you can run MML commands on the M2000 client or Web LMT.
NOTE

Local users are classified into default users and non-default users. Default users are admin and guest. Other
local users that are added through commands are non-default users.

Procedure
Step 1 For an OM user, log in to the M2000 client, and then choose Security > Local user setting. In
this Local User Setting window, set the status of non-default users, as shown in Figure 9-12.
l Select Manageable, indicating that you can create, modify, and delete a non-default local
user of a specified BS.
l Select Lock, indicating that other local users except admin and guest cannot log in to the
Web LMT.
l You can select multiple BSs from the list. Select one item from the shortcut menu and perform
the operation on the selected BSs in batches.

9-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

Figure 9-12 Setting the status of non-default local users

Step 2 Manage non-default local users on the M2000 client, as shown in Table 9-1.
NOTE

l An OM user can manage non-default local users remotely through the network management center by
logging in to the M2000 client.
l A local user manages non-default local users only through the Web LMT.
l For a local user, run the LST CMDS command to query the commands that can be executed. This
command can be executed only on the Web LMT.

CAUTION
l For local users, only the users in the Administrator group and customized users who can run
the commands in the G_15 command group can implement local user management, as shown
in Table 9-1.
l For OM users, only the users in the SMManagers group and users in the Administrator group
can implement local user management, as shown in Table 9-1.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-17

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

Table 9-1 Managing local users


Management Task

Command

Description

Set the password


policy for local users.

SET PWDPOLICY

Setting the password scheme for


local users may affect the
following operations:
l Adding and modifying a local
user
l Modifying the password by a
local user
l Logging in

Add local users of


different levels.

ADD OP

There are five user levels:


l Administrator
l Operator
l User
l Guest
l Custom
When adding the custom level,
set the command groups that can
be executed by the users of the
custom level.

Remove a local user.

RMV OP

Admin and guest are default


users, who cannot be removed.

Modify the local user MOD OP


information,
including redefining
authorities for local
users.

Admin and guest are default


users, whose information cannot
be modified.

Query the local user


information.

l If no query object is specified,


the basic information about
all users is returned.

LST OP

l If a query object is specified,


the detailed information
about the user is returned.
Only a user of the
Administrator level can query
the detailed information
about all users. A user of other
levels can query the detailed
information about the user
itself.

Step 3 Change the password of the admin and that of the guest.
l After logging in to the Web LMT by using the admin account, click Password, and then
enter the new password, as shown in Figure 9-13.
9-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

Figure 9-13 Changing the admin user password

l After logging in to the Web LMT by using the guest account, click Password, and then enter
the new password, as shown in Figure 9-14.
Figure 9-14 Changing the guest user password

----End
Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-19

DBS3900 WiMAX
Commissioning Guide

9 Appendixes

9.6 Commissioning Record Form


In the commissioning record form, you can record the problems in commissioning and handling
processes for reference to future commissioning.
Table 9-2 lists the commissioning records.
Table 9-2 Commissioning records
Contents filled in by the customer:
Office
Name

Equipment
Model

Capacity

Test
Personne
l

Telephone

Version

Required
Reply Time

Whether
the
Warranty
Period Has
Expired

Commiss
ion Time

Yes
No

Commissioning problems and handling process (in detail):


Approved by:
Department
stamp:

Contents filled in by Huawei personnel:


Handling
Mode

Instruction by phone Remote maintenance On-site support

Handling Result (here or refer to the attachment):


Handled by:
Date:

Outstanding problem:

9-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-01-25)

S-ar putea să vă placă și